Home

User`s Manual - PLANET Technology Corporation.

1. 259 5 4 70 profile alarm Description Enter this command to go to alarm profile configuration mode Syntax profile alarm Parameter None 5 4 71 profile igmp acl Description Enter this command to go to IGMP ACL profile configuration mode Syntax profile igmp acl lt profile index gt Parameter Name Description lt profile index gt Profile index Valid values 1 15 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 72 profile service adsl Description Enter this command to go to service profile configuration mode or delete a service profile Syntax profile service adsl lt profile index gt disable Parameter Name Description lt profile index gt Profile index Valid values 2 120 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 73 profile spectrum Description Enter this command to go to spectrum profile configuration mode or delete a spectrum profile Syntax profile spectrum adsl2 adsl2plus readsl2 lt profile index gt disable Parameter Name Description profile index Profile index Valid values 2 120 Default value Type Mandatory 260 5 4 74 profile tca xdsl Description Syntax Parameter Enter this command to go to TCA profile configuration mode or delete the specified TCA profile profile tca xdsl lt index gt disable Description TCA profile index Valid values 2 64 Default value Type Mandatory Nam
2. 197 Set the alarm type that may be sent Options are Rising Falling and Both Rising or Both If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is greater than or equal to the Rising Threshold then a StartupAlarm ap single rising alarm will be generated Falling or Both If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is less than or equal to the Falling Threshold then a single falling alarm will be generated Value This field shows the value of the monitored data Rising Threshold RMON alarm rising threshold 0 4294967295 Falling Threshold RMON alarm falling threshold 0 4294967295 Rising Event Index Falling Event Index This index is used when a rising threshold is crossed You must refer to the index of RMON Event table If there is no corresponding entry in the Event table then no association exists This index is used when a falling threshold is crossed You must refer to the index of RMON Event table If there is no corresponding entry in the Event table then no association exists Following figure shows an example of RMON alarm for ABSOLUTE sample type As shown in the figure the counting value keeps increasing But when the value overflows the system will count from zero again The sample in T2 is the first one crossing the Rising Threshold so an alarm occurs No alarms will be generated afterwards unless the counting value overflows and count from zero again
3. Display current setting for CLI configuration timeout value session value show cli config None Display cluster configuration Display cluster member list Display cluster status show cluster config member status None Display CPU information show cpu None 5 3 24 show dsl line identify Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 25 show fdb Description Syntax Parameter Display DSL line identify information show dsl line identify None Display all MAC learning table or by VLAN ID show fdb vlan lt VLAN ID gt Name lt VLAN ID gt Description VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 217 5 3 26 show fdbstatic Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 27 show firmware Display all static MAC forwarding table or by index show fdbstatic lt index gt Name Description lt index gt Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Optional Description Display firmware update status or partition information Note the Active status of the firmware partition information means the active partition for next time restart not current running partition local show firmware partition Current Version 0 73B05 Partition Version Date Status 1 0 73B05 2007 07 10 2 0 73B05 2007 07 10 Active Syntax show firmware status partition Parameter None 5 3 28 show help Description Display Help Syntax
4. lt gt Rate Limit Policer profile The IDL 4802 supports two kinds of TCM Policer two rate TCM with dual leaky buckets and single rate TCM with single leaky bucket The single rate TCM meters a traffic stream and marks its packets according to Committed Information Rate CIR and Committed Burst Size CBS to be either green or red The single rate TCM operates with a single leaky bucket that is updated according to only one rate the committed information rate CIR A packet is marked green if the leaky bucket is not full and red otherwise The two rate TCM meters a traffic stream and marks its packets based on two rates Committed Information Rate CIR and Excess Information Rate EIR and their associated burst sizes Committed Burst Size CBS and Excess Burst Size EBS to be either green yellow or red The two rate TCM operates with dual leaky bucket where each bucket is updated according to a different rate The first bucket is updated according to the CIR the second bucket is updated according to the EIR A packet is marked red if it exceeds the PIR Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending on whether it exceeds or doesn t exceed the EIR Rate Limit Policer Profile Rate Limit Type Policer Profile y Page 01 of 4 y Modify Delete Query CIR Committed Info Rate EIR Excess Info Rate LBS Leaky Bucket Size EIR amp 2nd LBS only in DLB mode Bac Shore Rio WI 200002000020 200 WW EE EN
5. 271 5 4 103 route delete Description Syntax Parameter Delete routing from route table route delete lt ipv4 address gt netmask lt ipv4 address gt Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 104 runningcfg active partition Description Syntax Parameter There are two memory partitions for storing the configuration data This command allows you to select the flash boot point partition for next power on runningcfg active partition lt number gt Name Description Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt 5 4 105 runningcfg load partition Description Syntax Parameter Load running configuration from memory runningcfg load partition lt number gt Name Description Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt 272 5 4 106 runningcfg login Description Login FTP server Syntax runningcfg login lt ipv4 address gt put lt filename gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address of TFTP server Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory lt filename gt Path and File name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 107 runningcfg write partition Descript
6. ADSL y Port 1 y evc 1 y LAN ID GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE Click on the drop down lists to select ADSL port and PVC number then type in VID and allowed source IP that can pass through the VLAN 102 4 2 2 5 MAC Spoofing This option allows you to enable disable anti MAC Spoofing function and MAC Spoofing detection log function From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then MAC Spoofing The following page is displayed MAC Spoofing Spoofing ON y Logi OFF y Set Query Ho VLAN ID GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE MAC Spoofing Setup Label Description Click on the drop down list to select OFF The system is able to provide service to users with duplicate MAC addresses ON The system is able to deny service to users with duplicate MAC addresses Spoofing Click on the drop down list to select Log OFF No log of MAC spoofing data when detected ON The system provides log when duplicated MAC addresses detected Set Click on this button to apply the setting Click on this button to get the MAC spoofing information the Log function must be enabled Query 103 4 2 3 Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Protocol STP can detect and eliminate network loops and provide backup links between bridges or switches It allows a device to interact with other STP aware devices to ensure that only one path exists between any two stations on the network
7. lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory protocol Input protocol name Valid values icmp ICMP Internet Control Message lt 1 gt igmp IGMP Internet Group Management lt 2 gt ipinip IP in IP encapsulation lt 4 gt tcp TCP Transmission Control lt 6 gt grp GRP Globin Reduction Protocol lt 7 gt igp IGP Any private interior gateway lt 9 gt 335 udp UDP User Datagram lt 17 gt gre GRE General Routing Encapsulation lt 47 gt eigrp EIGRP lt 88 gt ospf OSPF lt 89 gt Default value Type Mandatory 5 14 10 ipprotocol list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 11 srcip Description Syntax Parameter Show IP protocol priority list ipprotocol list None Specify source IP address of packets to remark vlan priority srcip lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la ip lt ipv4 address gt lt netmask gt srcip lt number gt list scrip lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Source IP address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value
8. ethertype lt number gt list ethertype lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Ether Type deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ethertype gt Ether Type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value Type Mandatory 5 12 8 ethertype list Description Display Ether Type deny access list Syntax ethertype list Parameter None 316 5 12 9 ip allowed Description Specify allowed source IP adderss of packets to filter Show allowed IP access list entry Delete specified allowed IP from access list Syntax ip allowed lt number gt allow xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt srcip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt ip allowed lt number gt list ip allwowed lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Static IP allow access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Allowed source IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandato
9. lt PRIO ID gt Replaced the priority level of packets out through the uplink port with the specified value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 285 5 4 140 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt many to one Description Set many to one VLAN translation Syntax vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt many to one replaced lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt user port VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt uplink VLAN ID gt Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt PRIO ID gt Replaced the priority level of packets out through the uplink port with the specified value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 286 5 4 141 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit la one to one Description Syntax Parameter Set one to one VLAN translation for link aggregation gigabit interface 1 C tag reserved vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt
10. Note that active partition means the partition for next Partition Information power up not current partition in use You can refer to Current Version to know which partition is the current partition in use When you update the firmware new firmware will be written to the partition that is not currently in use 178 FTP Get in progress The following message is displayed during getting file from FTP server incoming cluster id O FTP SERVER IP 172 16 10 41 Waiting For FTP Session about 30 sec Firmware Write in progress The Flash Write process may take a few minutes you must not turn off or reset the system during the process 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it 179 Firmware Write successfully When the Flash Write process has completed successfully the Firmware Update Status shows Firmware has upgraded already You can now restart the system Firrnware Update Firmware Update Firmware Partition Select Partition 1 y Once system has 2 versions an operator can use Partition Select from 1 to 2 vice versa e g Parition changes from version 4 a to version B b 0 73805 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it Current Versi
11. Rate Limit Broadcast Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Committed Information Rate 1536 1G bits per second The threshold rate to turn on the rate limit mechanism Leaky bucket size The unit is millisecond This parameter ranges from 1 Committed Information Rate Leaky Bucka to 1024 The bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter Modify Click on this button to modify data in the table Query Click on this button to get most recent status 127 lt gt Rate Limit Flooding Rate Limit Flooding Rate Limit Typel Flooding Flooding vol Committed information Rate 80000 1536 1000000000 Bits sec ke0 1 1024 Milli sec _Modity _Query Rate Limit Flooding Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Type in VLAN ID 1 4094 The VLAN must have been created in PESCHE vp the static VLAN table Committed Information Commted Information Rate 1536 1G bits per second The Rate threshold rate to turn on the rate limit mechanism Leaky bucket size The unit is millisecond This parameter ranges Leaky Bucket from 1 to 1024 The bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter Modify Click on this button to modify data in the table Query Click on this button to get most recent status 128
12. To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete orca y cicat y To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Incoming DS Click on the drop down list and select the incoming DSCP Diffserv Code Points which is a 6 bit number The standardized combinations are listed below default Default value bits 000000 af11 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Low Drop bits 001010 afi2 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Medium Drop bits 001100 af13 Assured Forwarding Class 1 High Drop bits 001110 af21 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Low Drop bits 010010 af22 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Medium Drop bits 010100 af23 Assured Forwarding Class 2 High Drop bits 010110 123 af31 af32 af33 af41 af42 af43 ef Assured Forwarding Class 3 Low Drop bits 011010 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Medium Drop bits 011100 Assured Forwarding Class 3 High Drop bits 011110 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Low Drop bits 100010 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Medium Drop bits 100100 Assured Forwarding Class 4 High Drop bits 100110 Expedited Forwarding bits 101110 Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 124 l
13. Type Mandatory 318 5 12 12 ipprotocol list Description Display IP protocol deny access list Syntax ipprotocol list Parameter None 5 12 13 l4dstport Description Specify L4 dest port of packets to reject Show specify L4 dest port access list entry Delete specify L4 dest port deny access list entry Syntax l4dstport lt number gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la port lt port number gt l4dstport lt number gt list l4dstport lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt L4 dest port deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt port number gt L4 destination port number Valid values 1 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 5 12 14 l4dstport list Description Display L4 dest port deny access list Syntax l4dstport list Parameter None 319 5 12 15 mcflidrate list Description Syntax _mcfldrate list Parameter None 5 12 16 mcfldrate vlan Description Display flooding rate limiting list Display flooding rate limiting list Syntax mcfldrate vlan lt VLAN ID gt list disable cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID
14. profile Syntax non share slb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Parameter Name Description number Share SLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 5 17 4 non share dlb Description Set non share DLB Dual Leaky Bucket Delete the non share DLB profile Syntax non share dlb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt eir lt eir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Parameter Name Description number Share DLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt First Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value 344 Type Mandatory lt eir gt Excess Info Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Second Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 345 5 18 Service Profile Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Service Profile execution mode 5 18 1 bitrate Description Set downstream upstre
15. 150 Carrier Mask N Click on this button to view modify the current downstream upstream Carrier Mask parameters Input Carrier bit value and then click Apply Modify Status Complete modems will re train after you click on Apply button ADSL Spectrum Profile 1 Carrier MASK Carriers 0 to 255 are used for all ADSL ADSL2 operational modes except for ADSL2 Plus which uses carriers 0 to 511 ADSL Spectrum RFI ADSL Spectrum OP Mode J To be continued 151 RFI N Click on this button to view modify Radio Frequency Interference RFI Bands data Input the Start Stop frequency select the Ingress Level Egress Control Signal Type and then click on the Apply button Modify Status Complete modems will re train after you click on Apply button ADSL Spectrum Profile 1 RFI BACK Rm Hm Rm MIC Rm ADSL Spectrum Carrier Mask ADSL Spectrum OP Mode J 152 4 3 1 4 Spectrum ADSLx Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL2 2 READSL spectrum profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Spectrum Profile ADSLx The following page is displayed ADSL Spectrum Profile ADSL2 Select Index 01 4 y Moaity Query The First Index is default profile can t modify amp delete To modify Spectrum Ada ReAdsl or Adsi2plus profile please create spectrum main profile first Modem Aggregate PSD Max Rx Aggr Direction Features Powe
16. 63 WEB Management Web Configuration Tool Overview To access Web Configuration Tool on an IDL 4802 1 Connect a PC to the console port of the DSLAM At the console type the following CLI command WDS gt enable enter the enable command mode from initial mode WDS show management all display all in band and out band management IP setting Note that the default in band out band IP address of the IDL 4802 is 192 168 100 1 192 168 1 1 2 At your web browser enter the URL you retrieve by using the above command If you need to change the accessing port number default is 80 of the Web Configuration Tool use the following CLI command with the correct values added WDS configure Zenter the configuration command mode from enable mode WDS conf http port lt number gt set http port number 3 Logging in to Web Configuration Tool Once you connect to the DSLAM a login page is displayed You must enter your username and password to access the pages The default login username and password are as follows User Name admin Password admin Click on the Sign in button You are now ready to configure your IDL 4802 using the Web Configuration Tool Web Interface Login Username hp Password ee i Signin Level 1 SuperUser RAW Management all a Level 2 Engineer R W Disabled from User Account a Level 3 Guest Read only Web Configuration Tool login page 64 4 The following page is
17. Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 2 default vlan Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 3 default prio Description Syntax Parameter Set acceptable frame type untagged only tagged only or all accfrm all tag untag None Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port default vian lt VLAN ID gt Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value 1 Type Mandatory Set default priority value for a bridge port default prio lt prio ID gt Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 292 5 7 4 dhcp relay Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 5 egress Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 6 force priority Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 7 igmp acl bind Description Syntax Parameter Enable disable DHCP relay or Set circuit ID remote ID for identifying the subscriber dhcp relay trusted untrusted circuit lt circuit ID gt remote lt remote ID gt Name Description lt circuit ID gt Circuit ID Valid values string type max length 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt remote ID Remote ID Valid values string type max length 48 Default value Type Mandatory Default PVID egress taged untagged setting egress tag untag None Force priority setting disabled reserve the original priority of all packets egress force the priori
18. Description Broadcast rate limiting CIR and LBS setting Syntax bcrate cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt Parameter Name Description lt cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value 80000 Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size millisecond Valid values 1 1024 Default value 80 Type Mandatory 5 12 2 bcrate list Description Show broadcast rate limiting list Syntax bcrate list Parameter None 313 5 12 3 dstmac Description Syntax Parameter 5 12 4 dstmac list Description Syntax Parameter Specify destination MAC address of packets to filter Show specified destination MAC deny access list entry Delete specified destination MAC deny access list entry dstmac lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la mac lt mac address gt dstmac lt number gt list dstmac lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Destination MAC deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt Destination MAC address Valid values xx xx xx Xx xx xx xx 00 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory Display
19. Label Description ADSL Port From To Type in the line port range Valid number 1 48 Click on this button to submit the modification once you have Modif entered new value for the ADSL line information Note that to y modify an entry you must select the checkbox on the leftmost column before you click on Modify luar Once you have typed in the port number range click on this button y to display line information of these ports Identifier Type in the ADSL line identifier Up to 63 characters is allowed Phone No Type in the phone number Up to 63 characters is allowed Description Type in any comment of this line Up to 63 characters is allowed 163 4 4 Traffic 4 4 1 ATM Traffic Descriptor This option allows you to modify the traffic table From the Traffic menu click on ATM Traffic Descriptor The following page is displayed ATM Traffic Descriptor PCR CDVT SCR MBS TYPE 20000 10000 0 D Pol liced Descriptor 2 Policed CBR Jatm lt CLP gt lt Transparent gt NoSCR y Create ADSL PVC CONFIGURATION ATM Traffic Descriptor Setup Label Description PCR PCR stands for Peak Cell Rate cells secona CDVT CDVT stands for Cell Delay Variation Tolerance microseconds SCR SCR stands for Sustained Cell Rate cells second MBS MBS stands for Maximum Burst Size cells This field will show Shaped or Policed depending on the descriptor type you select Click on this drop down list a
20. Type Mandatory number Interval number Valid values 1 96 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 83 show port template parameter Description Syntax Parameter Display parameter mask That is display which profiles or function of the template port are selected to be duplicated to other ports Mask means selected Unmask means not selected show port template parameter None 5 3 84 show priority list ds Description Syntax Parameter Display differentiated services priority list show priority list ds lt number gt Name Description number Differentiate services priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 85 show priority list dstip Description Syntax Parameter Display destination IP address priority list show priority list dstip lt number gt Name Description number Destination IP address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 231 5 3 86 show priority list dstmac Description Display destination MAC address priority list Syntax show priority list dstmac lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Destination MAC address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 87 show priority list ethertype Description Display specific Ether Type VLAN priority list Syntax show priority list ethertyp
21. Type Optional 210 5 1 12 system name Description Set system name Syntax system name lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt System name Valid values string type value Max 32 characters Default value Type Optional 5 1 13 system restart Description Restart the system Syntax system restart Parameter None alte 5 2 Initialize Mode Commands 5 2 1 enable Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 2 show license Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 3 show time Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 4 show uptime Description Syntax Parameter 5 2 5 show version Description Syntax Parameter Go to Enable execution mode from disable mode enable None Display GNU software license show license None Display current time show time None Display System up time and CPU loading show uptime None Display CLI software version show version None 212 5 3 Enable Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Enable execution mode 5 3 1 configure Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 2 ping Description Syntax Parameter Go to Configure execution mode from Enable mode configure None ICMP echo and reply from hostname address or IP address If no reply for a long time you can press Ctrl c to interrupt ping ping ipv4 address ping ipv4 address count lt count gt ping ipv4 address size lt size gt
22. lt port gt adsl channel ooooonnnccnn 224 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl failure ooooo 224 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line 0 eee 224 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line contfig 225 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line delt test 225 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line information 225 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl inventory 0000 225 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl operatonal 226 show interface xdsl all lt port gt bridge oooooooccccccccccccccccccnncos 226 show interface xdsl all lt port gt CellCOUNT eee 226 show interface xdsl all lt port gt counter cece 226 show interface xdsl all lt port gt pos 227 show interface xdsl all lt port gt we 227 show interface xdsl all lt port gt wan 227 show interface bridge EE 227 5 3 65 5 3 66 5 3 67 5 3 68 5 3 69 5 3 70 5 3 71 5 3 72 5 3 73 5 3 74 5 3 75 5 3 76 5 3 77 5 3 78 5 3 79 5 3 80 5 3 81 5 3 82 5 3 83 5 3 84 5 3 85 5 3 86 5 3 87 5 3 88 5 3 89 5 3 90 5 3 91 5 3 92 5 3 93 5 3 94 5 3 95 5 3 96 5 3 97 5 3 98 5 3 99 5 3 100 5 3 101 5 3 102 5 3 103 5 3 104 5 3 105 5 3 106 5 3 107 5 3 108 5 3 109 5 3 110 5 3 111 5 3 112 5 3 113 5 3 114 5 3 115 5 3 116 show interface Counter 227 show int
23. rebind the profile Quickly Profile ID Assign Quickly Binding Assign Click on this button to apply the parameter values you have just Assign entered or selected But these values haven t been really saved in the database You must click on Modify to save the values Modify Click on this button to submit the modification 141 Click on the checkbox to select the port you want to modify or Port assign values You can type in the maximum IGMP groups can be joined Max Grou s simultaneously to limit the concurrent multicast channels for a H bridge port This value is effective only when the limit maximum IGMP groups function is enabled Profile ID You can select the profile ID you want to bind here Binding Status You can select the binding action here 142 4 2 7 3 IGMP Multicast This option allows you to query the IGMP multicast status From the Bridge menu click on IGMP and then GMP Multicast The IGMP Group page is displayed Click on the GMP Type drop down list and select Group or Source IGMP Type gt Group Click on List by drop down list to select listing by entry number or listing by VID amp IGMP group IP List by Number IGMP Group IGMP Type Group y List pel Number y No From 1 To 5 Query IGMP Group List by Number Label Description No From To Type in the entry number range in the table Query Click on this button to
24. 30 31 32 33 S 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Number Port Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 For port 25 48 26 50 co L AQ PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Number Port Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip 5 Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Number 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 amp 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 PIN 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Number Port Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Number 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 28 4 Uplink Interfaces Connections 48 Port DSLAM Switch PLANET y EEE 1 600000000000000000000000 ga st 000000000000000000000000 The system provides two types of trunk interfaces two ports for each type There are electrical RJ 45 and optical SFP interfaces When both electrical and optical ports are connected system will automatically select the interface according to the priority setting Fiber first or Copper first RJ 45 electrical trunk port pin assignment LEDA _LEDB 1 2 T Rx T Rx Ta 3 6 T Rx T Rx LE Tamu 4 5 T RX T Rx d 7 8 TIR
25. 5 8 19 vlan list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan list Parameter None 303 5 9 GBE LA Bridge Mode Commands 5 9 1 accfrm Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 2 default vlan Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 3 default prio Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 4 egress Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 5 ingress Description Syntax Parameter Set acceptable frame type untagged only tagged only or all accfrm all tag untag None Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port default vian lt VLAN ID gt Name Description VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value 1 Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt Set default priority value for a bridge port default prio lt prio ID gt Name Description Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Default PVID egress taged untagged setting egress tag untag None Enable disable ingress filter mode ingress enable disable None 304 5 9 6 isolation Description Enable Disable default PVID isolation setting Syntax isolation disable Parameter None 5 9 7 lacp actor priority system Description Set actor s system priority Link aggregation only Syntax lacp actor priority system lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Set system priority value Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory
26. 5 9 8 link mode Description Set link mode uplink mode or user mode Syntax link mode uplink user Parameter None 5 9 9 max mac Description Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis Syntax max mac lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Maximum number of the MAC addresses Valid values 1 4096 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 305 5 9 10 priority regen Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 11 stack Description Syntax Parameter 5 9 12 tcm policer Description Syntax Parameter VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter priority regen incoming lt incoming prio gt outgoing lt outgoing prio gt disable Name Description Incoming VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt incoming prio gt Outgoing VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt outgoing prio gt Enable disable VLAN stacking stack enable disable None Bind Unbind Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile tcm policer lt naumber gt bind unbind Name Description TCM policer profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt 5 9 13 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Syntax Parameter Delete a VLAN from memberset table vlan
27. ADSL Bridge ADSL Port Security Static VLAN Protocol Based VLAN VLAN Configuration Translation VLAN Static Allowed IP MAC Spoofing Spanning Tree Protocol STP Port Settings Filtering VLAN Priority Remark Rate Limit Priority Queue Mapping TP Forwarding DB Interface Setup Spanning Tree Access Control Forwarding Forwarding Static Relay DSL Line Identify Protocol amp Route Port IGMP IGMP Profile 66 IGMP Multicast BRAS MAC IPOA Interface Setup ADSL Service Profile main Service Profile Channel Profile Spectrum Profile main Spectrum Profile ADSLx TCA Profile Inventory Loop Test Data amp Inventory Gamer Das OP Data Line Configuration SAO Line Information Traffic ATM Traffic Descriptor SNMP SNMP Community SNMP Target SNMP Notify Maintenance SYS Log Server Database Firmware Update ATM Loopbacks Fault Management Alarm Event Alarm Profile Hardware Temp Performance Monitoring System Utilization Ethernet Statistics ATM Statistics RMON ADSL Day Interval 67 Operating Examples This section explains how to operate in the web pages of this tool Configuration area Data Table Index Selecting area ADSL PYC Setup pl 0 val 35 Traffic Rx Default UnShaped y Tx Default UnShaped y d P
28. FiRestore Factory G Flash Boot Point Select WEB GUI yi TT Running Config Download Config A be TFTP SERVER FALSH DEVICE A AAA System Cont Boot Point Select DB Configuration Concept D weg For CLI Suppose that TFTP Server IP address is 172 16 100 181 and configuration file name is testcfg A Import file from TFTP Server to the Download Config and then write Download Config to the Flash partition 1 or partition 2 Ex enable configure remotecfg login 172 16 100 181 get testcfg write partition lt number gt AQ B Import file from TFTP Server to the Download Config and then load Download Config to the Running Config Ex enable configure remotecfg login 172 16 100 181 get testcfg load C Export export file from Running config to the TFTP server Ex enable configure runningcfg login 172 16 100 181 put testcfg D Save Running config to the Flash partition 1 or partition 2 Ex enable configure runningcfg write partition lt number gt E Reload Flash data to the Running config Ex enable configure runningcfg load partition lt number gt F Set system configuration current boot point to factory default value Ex enable configure restore factory G Select Configuration Flash Boot Point Ex enable configure runningcfg active partition lt number gt 41 For Web On the menu tree click on Maintenanc
29. Min max planned bit rate Interleaving Max delay and Minimum impulse noise protection e Spectrum Profile The parameters include the Power management setting Min max target noise margin allowed ADSL modes of operation Carrier mask RFI band data Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power Maximum PSD level PSD shape for ADSL2 Power back off initiation and Maximum aggregate receive power e TCA Profile The parameters include ESs SESs UASs for interval and day PM and LOS LOF LOPWR LOL Error Frame for interval PM only The system provides up to 120 Service profiles and Spectrum profiles respectively and provides up to 64 TCA profiles One of the profiles is a fix default that cannot be modified users are allowed to create delete and edit the other profiles Each profile contains a parameter set for downstream and upstream direction respectively Users can also observe the actual values of these parameters through CLI Web GUI or EMS The ADSL configuration also includes the function for user to query the line status the physical layer status and the channel interface status for ATU C and ATU R The status information includes the attenuation rate actual net data rate the line attenuation SNR margin transmission power actual interleaving delay channel characteristics per subcarrier quiet line noise PSD etc 56 3 3 Performance management Performance management supports performance monitoring by coll
30. Optional 219 5 3 34 show igmp acl bind gigabit la Description Display IGMP ACL bind status for link aggregation gigabit interface Syntax show igmp acl bind gigabit la Parameter None 5 3 35 show igmp acl bind xdsl Description Display IGMP ACL bind status for xdsl bridge port Syntax show igmp acl bind xdsl lt port gt Parameter Name Description port Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 36 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds snr Description Display carrier information of far end snr downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds snr Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 37 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds qin Description Display carrier information of far end qln downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds qin Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 220 5 3 38 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlin Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier informat
31. RESTART Address Management 192 168 100 172 16 100 23 255 255 255 255 255 0 0 Iv Disable DHCP Client y EH 60 jo zl 4294967295 HTTP Port MGMT Speed Remote IP System Name 80 uz711F14 System Inventory Modify the configuration may cause the connection loss Label Description IP Address Type in the IP address of the DSLAM for in band management Subnet Mask Type in the in band subnet mask of the DSLAM GBE No Limit VID Select this checkbox if no specific in band management VLAN is required In Band and the setting in Limit VID parameter will be ignored Limit VID The VLAN ID for individual in band management VLAN Priorit Select the VLAN priority level 0 7 of the in band management traffic sent y out from GBE port IP Address Type in the out band IP address of the DSLAM Subnet Mask Type in the out band subnet mask of the DSLAM Click on the drop down list and select Enable Disable or Renew obtain IP MGMT DHCP Client address again DHCP Client function This option is used to get a dynamic Out Band IP address via DHCP for out band management interface MGMT port ut Ban 7 DHCP Timeout Dm in DHCP Timeout second Valid value 1 4294967295 Default is Type in DHCP lease time second Valid value DHCP Lease 1 4294967295 HTTP Port Shows current HTTP port setting for Web access You can modify http port setting in this field MGMT Speed
32. SNMP Trap for all memory updates reflecting changes in the system configuration It also provides logging the changes in the operational state and making this information available on demand to the operators over the operation interface The system contains a database DB to store all the provisioning data so that the configuration can be restored in re booting Authorized operators can query the DB to obtain configuration data 3 2 1 Bridge Configuration The bridge configuration of the IDL 4802 includes the following aspects e Interface setup e VLAN configuration static VLAN protocol based VLAN VLAN translation and IP MAC anti spoofing e Spanning Tree configuration e Access Control Filtering VLAN priority remark rate limit and priority queue mapping e Forwarding database e PPPoE and DHCP Relay e IGMP configuration e IPoA configuration 55 3 2 2 ADSL Configuration Configuration for an ADSLx user port is provisioned by the parameter set which is a group of attributes that determine the user port behaviors and we call it as profile The IDL 4802 provides a profile based provisioning per the definition of ITUT G997 1 and RFC 2662 for ADSL line configuration data and a mechanism to associate the ADSL port to these profiles One or more ADSL lines may be configured to share parameters of a single profile The ADSL profiles of IDL 4802 include e Service Profile The parameters include Rate adaptive mode selection
33. The PLANET IDL 4802 is a 1 5U high box type IP DSLAM with rack mountable enclosure It can be installed in a standard 19 inch rack by using the mounting brackets provided Mount the shelf on the rack using the large screws provided STANDARD FRONT MOUNT MOUNTING lt MOUNTING BRACKET H A BRACKET FRONT 2 2 1 System Requirements Workstation with Windows NT 2000 XP RJ 45 cables RJ 11 cables Telco 50 cables RS 232 console cable lt Optional gt MDF Patch Panel Model No IDL PAN 48 23 2 2 2 Installation Procedure 1 Power and Ground Connections Power Connections With IDL 4802 connect the ac power cord to the ac supply socket on the rear panel as below figure and plug the cord into the external power source The voltage must be 100 to 240V AC With IDL 4802 48 the DC power interface is a 4 pin terminal block with polarity signs on the front panel as below figure It can be powered from two 48V DC power supply The DC power connector is a 4P terminal block 2P is for accommodating one DC power input and other 2P is for accommodating another DC power input The DC power should be connected to a well fused power supply After completing chassis installation please apply power to the fused power distribution panel feeding the chassis When using a DC voltmeter please check for proper voltage 60V 36V DC and make sure that the polarity is correct 48 Port DSLAM Swit
34. characters Default value Type Mandatory 267 5 4 91 rmon event lt index gt owner Description Set RMON event owner Syntax rmon event lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt Owner name Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 92 rmon event lt index gt type Description Set RMON event type no alarm only syslog only SNMP trap or both syslog and SNMP trap Syntax rmon event lt index gt type none log trap both Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 93 rmon history lt index gt buckets_requested Description Set RMON history buckets requested Syntax rmon history lt index gt buckets_requested lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Buckets requested value Valid values 1 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 268 5 4 94 rmon history lt index gt delete Description Delete RMON history entry Syntax rmon history lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid value
35. mode 5 17 1 share slb Description Set share SLB Single Leaky Bucket Delete the share SLB profile Syntax share slb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Parameter Name Description number Share SLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 5 17 2 share dlb Description Set share DLB Dual Leaky Bucket Delete the share DLB profile Syntax share dlb lt number gt cir lt cir gt lbs lt lbs gt eir lt eir gt lbs lt lbs gt disable Parameter Name Description number Share DLB profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt First Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory lt eir gt Excess Info Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 343 Default value Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Second Leakage Bucket Size bits Valid values 1 1024 Default value Type Mandatory 5 17 3 non share slb Description Set non share SLB Single Leaky Bucket Delete the non share SLB
36. ping ipv4 address count lt count gt size lt size gt Name Description ipv4 address IPv4 address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value count The number of PING packets sent Default value size Packet size Default value 5 3 3 show access list bcrate Description Syntax Parameter Display all broadcast rate limiting list show access list bcrate None 5 3 4 show access list dstip Description Syntax Parameter Display all dest IP deny access list or by index show access list dstip lt index gt Name Description lt index gt Destination IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 213 5 3 5 show access list dstmac Description Display all destination MAC address deny access list or by index Syntax show access list dstmac lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Destination MAC deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 6 show access list ethertype Description Display all EtherType deny access list or by index Syntax show access list ethertype lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt EtherType deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 7 show access list ip allowed Description Display all static IP allowed access list or b
37. the PM counters of other lower ranking alarms will not System Alarms The IDL 4802 provides the following System alarms e House Keeping Alarm 1 e House Keeping Alarm 2 e House Keeping Alarm 3 e House Keeping Alarm 4 e Fan Failure Alarm e Fan card unequipped alarm e Above Temperature e Below Temperature e Self test Fail e DSP Fail you can see which DSP chip is fail from the user interface Web GUI CLI etc There is anumber 1 4 in the alarm message description corresponding to the DSP chip 1 chip 4 60 GBE Alarms The IDL 4802 provides the following alarms for GBE interfaces e GBE1 SFP Loss of Signal e GBE2 SFP Loss of Signal ADSL Alarms The IDL 4802 provides the following ADSL alarms e LOS Loss of Signal Near End Far End e LOF Loss of Frame Near End Far End e LOM Loss of Margin Near End Far End e LCD Loss of Cell Delineation Near End Far End e NCD No Cell Delineation Near End Far End e LOPWR Loss of Power Far End COMME Unable to communicate with peer modem Far End e NOPEER No peer present Far End 3 5 Loopback Testing The IDL 4802 supports ATM and ADSL loop diagnostics ATM The system provides F5 end to end or segment loopback ADSL The system provides Dual Ended Loop Testing DELT for each ADSL line on a per port basis The following test parameters are supported Channel Characteristics Function H f per subcarrier CCF ps Quiet
38. the sample in T10 causes an alarm again Absolute Value Over Flow 252 1 Count from Zero again Alarm Falling Threshold E E E E E satnnnuuuoooooseooeeessssonnnnne Tl T2 T3 T10 Time 198 Another figure shows the example of RMON alarm for DELTA sample type As shown in the following figure the delta value varies high and low The sample in T1 is the first one crossing the Rising Threshold so an alarm occurs No alarms will be generated afterwards until T5 sample which is crossing the Falling Threshold note that the value of the previous sample T4 sample is greater than the Falling Threshold and the value of T5 sample Alarm is not generated for T7 sample since an alarm is already generated for T5 sample and the curve is not in a downward trend around T7 A Rising Threshold crossing alarm is generated again for T10 sample because a Falling Threshold crossing alarm T5 has occurred after the previous Rising Threshold crossing alarm T1 Delta Value Falling Threshold 199 lt Event This option allows you to configure the RMON event setting Click on New to create an entry To modify an entry click on the index to select the entry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete Remote Monitoring Event Select Typel Event y Next No RMON4 Modify Delete Query 4 Description Descriptiong
39. 03 27 Partition 1 Partition 1 Partition 1 i SYSTEM MAC Bridge MAC Gigal MAC Giga2 MAC 00 30 4F 71 53BD 00 30 4F 71 53 BB 00 304F 71 53BC Hardware Firmware Software Web Circuit 1 48 C 0 77B03 0 77B03 Ud 08 26a AnnexA GIGA STATUS Gigal Giga LA SYSLED ALM LED Config Enabled Config Enabled Config Disabled o o 35 Step 3 Configure the DSL PVC Go to Bridge gt Interface Setup gt ADSL PVC setting screen select the ADSL port and click Create to apply the PVC settings For example create PVC 1 to Port 1 The default VPI VCI is 0 35 System Bridge val 0 o val 35 TrafficRx Default UnShaped y 1x Default UnShaped y Interface Setup gt r Encap LLC Y Protocol Base VLAN Disabled Y ADSL PVC eae po ADSL Bridge Port 01 12 v PvC 1 vw Query ADSL Port Security gt Protocol VLAN Configuration Select Port VPI VC Rx Traffic Tx Traffic ENCAP Base VLAN Access Control Co 7 Forwarding Relay IGMP IPoA ADSL Traffic SNMP Maintenance ATM TRAFFIC PARAMETER You can see the Port has been created vet 0 wt 35 Tratfic Rx Defaut UnShaped Y Tx Defautt UnShaped v Encap LLC Y Protocol Base VLAN Disabled w au Ol Port 01 12 PwC Query Select Port VPI VCI Rx Traffic Tx Traffic ENCAP Protocol Base VLAN 36 Step 4 Enable the ADSL Port Service Go to System gt ADSL Port Service setting screen select the
40. 1 to 256 Query Delete Destination IP P P P msp fo fo fo Priority Out y Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup IP Destination Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view No From To value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this Query button to retrieve To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this Delete button to delete oca y eca y Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA GOA Kal bridge port Source IP Type in the IP address of the coming source MASK Type in the subnet mask Priority Out SC on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 118 lt gt MAC Source VLAN MAC Source Priority Remark PRI Remark HMAC Source y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 2 Source MAC foo foo foo foo foo foo Priorty Out 9 Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup MAC Source Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view No From
41. 1 traffic setting atmNoClpScrCdvt vbr1 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt SCI gt Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 325 5 13 7 vbr2 Description Syntax Parameter VBR type 2 traffic setting atmCloNoTaggingScrCdvt vbr2 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt SCI gt Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 326 5 13 8 vbr3 Description Syntax Parameter VBR type 3 traffic setting atmClpTaggin
42. 500 s The burstiness of IGMP traffic is inversely proportional to the Max Response Time A longer Max Response Time will soread Report messages over a longer interval However a longer Max Response Time in Group Specific and Source and Group Specific Queries extends the leave latency The leave latency is the time between when the last member stops listening to a source or group and when the traffic stops flowing Value range is 1 500 Default is 10 LMQT 1 500 s The Last Member Query Interval is the Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Code inserted into Group Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages It is also the Max Response Time used in calculating the Max Resp Code for Group and Source Specific Query messages Value range is 1 500 Default is 1 GMT 1 500 s Giga1 Giga2 LA Read only value The Group Membership Interval is the amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more members of a group or a particular source on a network This value MUST be the Robustness Variable times the Query Interval plus one Query Response Interval Click on this radio button to select GBE1 GBE2 LA as the IGMP router port Route Port VID Type in the VID you want to setup delete the router port for Valid VID value is 1 4094 Type in IGMP router IP address When working in IGMP proxy mode DSLAM will send IGMP general query whose source IP address
43. ADSL port and Admin is ON Click Modify to make this Port is ON System gt gt ADSL Port Service Admin ON Y Bervice Profile 1 SpectrumProfle 1 TcAProfile 1 an range from 1 to 120 The Spectrum Profile range from 1 to 120 The TCA Profile range from 1 to 64 Port 01 12 w Query o of oe 14 ar O 2 SEET Or d y d o F mm o ia a E D O 4 or Or a H 4 oO 5 OFF OFF 1 1 1 D r CO ieee dc E Fi KS O 7 OFF or a 1 e e or OFF Ea 4 341 e 3 OFF OFF 1 1 a H We 10 o o 1 1 7 le 11 OFF OFF TE A A You can see the Admin status became to ON System gt gt ADSL Port Service ea ON Service Profile 1 Spectrum Profile 1 TcaProfle 1 a The Service Profile range from 1 to 120 The Spectrum Profile range from 1 to 120 The TCA Profile range from 1 to 64 Port oim12 v Port a Admin wen Service Spectrum Tea Siet Bt Status _ Profile Profile Profile O 1 ON I at nu EHS 2 op os 1 1 1 om 3 or or 1 4 4 O 4 OFF OFF A 4 1 Ob 5 OFF OFF i 1 d CECR art ar E a Ss Te 7 OFF OFF 1 1 SCH E or Es 4 ses Oo a OFF OFF 1 4 a e 10 OFF E 1 1 J l 5 11 OFF OFF ii 1 4 37 Step 5 Connect the ADSL2 2 CPE to Patch Panel Connect the ADSL2 2 CPE to Patch Panel and configure it the VPI VCI value must be the same with IDL 4802 After finish setting t
44. Control and then Filtering The following page is displayed Click on Filtering Type drop down list to select a filtering type first Filtering Filtering Typel Select y GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Protocol Filtering Protocol Filtering Filtering Typel Protocol y No From 1 To 1 No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL y Port 1 y evc 1 y Next No 2 Protocal 01 ICMP Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Protocol Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid On 10 number value 1 256 Quer Once you have specified the serial number click on this y button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or ADSL P rt 1 Pvc 1 a GIGA bridge port Protocol Click on this drop down list and select a protocol to deny ICMP IGMP IP in IP TCP GRP IGP UDP GRE EIGRP or OSPF Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 108 Source MAC Filtering Source MAC Filtering Filtering Type Source MAC y No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 2 Source MAC foo oo foo foo foo fo Create Source MAC
45. DiffServ differentiated services stripping and priority queuing DSCP mapping to 802 1p Selectable adopted priority queue mechanisms according to Strict Priority Queue SPQ and Weighted Fair Queue WFQ Configurable mapping function between ATM PVC and 802 1p priority queue Supports IP CoS technology Web based GUI management Local RS 232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP Telnet SSH management Remote in band SNMP Telnet SSH management Firmware upgradeable via FTP SNMP v1 v2c 241 Installation The followings are instructions for setting up the IDL 4802 Refer to the illustration and follow the simple steps below to quickly install your IP DSLAM 2 1 Safety Instruction The following is the safety instructions for IP DSLAM before installing gt gt The maximum operating temperature of the IP DSLAM is 65 C Care must be taken to allow sufficient air circulation or space between units when the IP DSLAM is installed inside a closed rack assembly and racks should safely support the combined weight of all IP DSLAM gt gt The connections and equipment that supply power to the IP DSLAM should be capable of operating safely with the maximum power requirements of the IP DSLAM In the event of a power overload the supply circuits and supply wiring should not become hazardous gt gt The AC power cord must plug into the right supply voltage Make sure that the supplied AC voltage is correct and stabl
46. EMS 57 ADSL PM The IDL 4802 provides the following ADSL PM statistics Item Description ATUC_LOS Loss of signal count ATUC_LOF Loss of frame count ATUC_LOM Loss of margin count ATUC_ES Errored Seconds ATUC_SES Severely Errored Seconds ATUC_UAS Unavailable Seconds ATUC_RelnitCounter The number of times the modem left showtime and tried to re initialize the line because of detection of a persistent defect ATUC_FailedInitCounter The number of times the modem tries to initialize the line but fails ATUC_CU User Total Cell Count ATUC_CD Delineated Total Cell Count ATUC_HEC ATM Header Error Count ATUC_IBE Idle Cell Bit Error Count ATUC_CVS The counter associated with the number of Coding Violations encountered by the channel ATUC_FECCS The counter associated with the number of corrected codewords encountered by the channel ATUR_LOS Far End Loss of signal count ATUR_LOF Far End Loss of frame count ATUR_LOM Far End Loss of margin count ATUR_LPR Far End Loss of power count ATUR_LPR Far End Loss of power failure count ATUR_ES Far End Errored Seconds ATUR_SES Far End Severely Errored Seconds ATUR_UAS Far End Unavailable Seconds ATUR_HEC Far End ATM Header Error Count ATUR_IBE Far End Idle Cell Bit Error Count ATUR_CVS The far end counter associated with the number of Coding Violations encountered by the channel ATUR_FECCS The fa
47. G G G G G G G G G G G e E Bib 6 Gb G G Gy te Gr RG o Port 2 y Type Loap C cain Query The GAIN formula gain value 1 512 The GAIN allocation over the Downstream passband Near END ojojaojojaojajaojaojajajajajajajajojajajajajajajajajajajajajajaja o 442 334 469 541 A55 Pal 409 573 405 625 394 495 A55 590 S41 402 442 590 541 402 455 625 405 541 511 492 469 455 809 419 573 482 526 496 42 42 489 455 430 442 442 442 419 4139 419 405 419 405 405 405 405 442 459 405 394 405 394 394 394 405 405 205 405 405 394 405 405 413 405 405 405 405 413 413 413 430 430 430 AM 40 40 40 442 442 442 442 455 455 455 455 469 469 469 442 482 442 492 492 511 525 492 405 492 405 405 405 432 405 432 405 42 492 459 432 469 42 402 469 469 455 489 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 455 489 455 489 455 455 42 469 455 489 455 455 455 489 432 469 489 469 489 469 455 489 455 469 469 422 207 492 492 A0 405 496 492 496 405 496 405 496 511 405 511 405 405 496 495 511 511 495 496 525 525 496 526 525 EE 294 AD 482 406 482 AD AM A 406 405 406 405 495 525 405 4065 406 406 412 482 42 42 42 AD 469 469 489 42 4569 469 492 A55 469 422 442 492 492 492 482 492 492 405 405 405 432 405 207 207 405 405 405 405 405 406 405 405 405 406 405 405 405 4065 406 405 511 496 205 511 405 405 496 511 511 511 511 525 511 495 511 511 525 511 525 511 511 511 511 511 511 526 525 525 526 526 526 525 541 526 526 385 526 526 526 526 541 525 395 541 541 541 394 541 541 557 395 557 557 541 406 557
48. HK port To make the fans work you must use an RJ45 to RJ45 connector cable to connect the two FAN ports FAN Port RJ 45 pin assignment 12345678 OI eno FAN FAN FAN FAN SS ERR1 ERR2 ERR3 Status 3 4 5 6 7 8 26 3 ADSL and POTS Connections The IDL 4802 supports 48 ports ADSL subscribers per box There are four RJ 21 50 pin female connectors on the front panel of the system Two for ADSL lines and two for POTS interfaces To connect the subscriber lines use cables with the RJ 21 50 pin male connectors When installing just plug the end of cable with connector into the LINE and PHONE connectors on the front panel The other end of the cable is generally tied to the MDF Main Distribution Frame Note The MDF Patch panel is optional of standard package Please plug in the RJ 21 cable with connector tenon as below figures Line Strip Connector Tenon de 3 i La Y Screw RJ21 Connector 27 LINE PHONE interface pin assignment For port 1 24 0 26 25 1 5 PIN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Number Port Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip S Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Tip Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 PIN 26 27 28 29
49. Level Mask 101 SYS_HOUSEKEEP1 MN UnMesk 102 SYS_HOUSEKEEP2 MN UnMask C 103 SYS_HOUSEKEEP3 MN UnMask f 104 SYS_FAN MN UnMask C 105 SYS_SELFTESTFAILED MN UnMesk 106 SYS_ABOVETEMP MN UnMask C 10 SYS_BELOWTEMP MN UnMesk 110 S S_HOUSEKEEP4 MN UnMask C 115 SYS_FANCARDUNEO MN UnMask 116 GBE1 SFP LOS MN UnMask C 117 GBE2 SFP LOS MN UnMask 118 SYS_DSP MN UnMask C 601 ADSL_LOS MN UnMask 602 ADSL_LOF MN UnMask C 603 ADSL_LOM MN UnMesk 610 ADSL_LCD MN UnMask C 612 ADSL_NCD MN UnMesk 613 ADSL_LOS_FE MN UnMask C 614 ADSL_LOF FE MN UnMask 615 ADSL_LOM_FE MN UnMask C 616 ADSL_LOPWR_FE MN UnMesk 619 ADSL_COMMF_FE MN UnMask C 620 ADSL_NOPEER_FE MN UnMesk 622 ADSL_LCD_FE MN UnMask C 624 ADSL_NCD_FE MN UnMask 185 4 6 5 3 Hardware Temperature This page allows you to e view current system temperature e set several temperature and time thresholds see description in the following table From the Maintenance menu click on Fault Management and then Hardware Temp The following page is displayed Temperature Threshold If current temperature exceeds descends Up Down Shift Threshold Alarm Manager will declare that there is a highflower temperature alarm after Up Down ShiftTime seconds ALARMEYENT Temperature Configuration Label Description Modify Click on this button to submit the update once you have entered all the new threshold values Current Temperature C This fiel
50. Line Noise PSD QLN f per subcarrier QLN ps Signal to Noise Ratio SNR f per subcarrier SNR ps Line Attenuation LATN Signal Attenuation SATN Signal to Noise Ratio Margin SNRM Attainable Net Data Rate ATTNDR Far end Actual Aggregate Transmit Power ACTATP Near End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power ACTATP 62 3 6 Cluster Feature The IDL 4802 supports Cluster feature that can make a group of NEs network elements work together as a single NE from the management point of view Operators can manage the NEs in a cluster called cluster nodes via the same single IP address in terms of CLI Web based GUI or SNMP based management interfaces The IDL 4802 currently provides cluster feature that a cluster can include up to four cluster members NEs There are one Master and the other members are all Slaves in a cluster The Master works as a gateway of the Slaves and it also can forward CLI Web SNMP commands to the destination Slave The Slaves can execute the commands and respond to the Master There are two possible network topologies for conducting a Clustering Management group Daisy chain and Star PC out band management IDL4802 emp Uplink User link Uplink User link EMAN PC in band management Cluster network topology Daisy Chain Master Slave Slave IDL4802 IDL4802 IDL 4802 emm GBE GBE GBE Kate Rei M Uplink LAN GBE uplink Cluster network topology Star
51. Mandatory 289 5 5 Ethernet Interface Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Ethernet Interface execution mode 5 5 1 bridge Description Syntax Parameter 5 5 2 gbe admin Description Syntax Parameter 5 5 3 gbe speed Description Syntax Parameter Enter bridge configuration mode Set bridge port to default status bridge default None Set Gigabit Ethernet administrative status ON OFF gbe admin on off None Set Gigabit ethernet speed to auto negotiate 100Mbps half duplexing or 100Mbps full duplexing Set Copper or SFP as the first priority of GBE physical interface gbe speed auto half_100mbps full_100mbps physical copper sfp None 290 5 6 Interface Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Interface execution mode 5 6 1 bridge Description Syntax Parameter 5 6 2 adsl config Description Syntax Parameter 5 6 3 poa Description Syntax Parameter Enter ATM bridge configuration mode Disable bridge port bridge lt bridge id gt disable Name Description bridge id Bridge number Valid values 1 8 Default value 1 Type Mandatory Enter adsl configuration mode adsl config None Enter IPoA RFC 2684 routed mode ipoa None 291 5 7 ATM Bridge Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the ATM Bridge execution mode 5 7 1 accfrm
52. O 283 vlan ethertype s tag vaina iaa 283 vlan Droiocolbase nn 284 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt 285 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt 286 10 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 4 141 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit la one to one 287 5 4 142 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit la many to one 288 5 4 143 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt disable 289 Ethernet Interface Mode COMMANAS ccccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeeeees 290 5 5 1 De e 290 5 5 2 JE A NA 290 5 5 3 A DEE 290 Interface Mode COMMANOS oooooocccccccnonnnnnnnnccncncnononnnnnnnncocnnnnerennnnnnnnncccnnrennnns 291 5 6 1 A casa toes oahu Sanh aise es shia heal siete Sei h at aa 291 5 6 2 le e EE 291 5 6 3 ale E 291 ATM Bridge Mode Commands scccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 292 5 7 1 A ve dees cree aaro Ea Eaa a E EE EES 292 5 7 2 default Eeer 292 5 7 3 e 292 5 7 4 dh p r lay src a ete a hati is ee eden hee dae 293 5 7 5 GE 293 5 7 6 force A eee Aes ee ee eee 293 5 7 7 igmp acl A 293 5 7 8 elle E e Ra lge EE 294 5 7 9 elei 294 5 7 10 ee CO a a AA O 294 5 7 11 Solato e EE EE 294 5 7 12 len Un nasa ooo 294 5 7 13 BUS 294 5 7 14 priority regen siii 295 5 7 15 POLO CO Be 295 5 7 16 UE 295 5 7 17 eene ite eee ee Ree At ede 295 5 7 18 pvc
53. Oversize Pkts Rx Fragments Monitoring Rx oversize packets Monitoring Rx fragments packets Rx Jabbers Monitoring Rx jabber packets Tx Collisions Monitoring Tx single collision packets Tx Rx Pkts 64 bytes Monitoring Tx Rx 64 bytes packets Tx Rx Pkts 65 127 bytes Monitoring Tx Rx 65 to 127 bytes packets Tx Rx Pkts 128 255 bytes Monitoring Tx Rx 128 to 255 bytes packets Tx Rx Pkts 256 511 bytes Monitoring Tx Rx 256 to 511 bytes packets Tx Rx Pkts 512 1023 bytes Monitoring Tx Rx 512 to 1023 bytes packets Tx Rx Pkts 1024 1518 bytes Monitoring Tx Rx 1024 to 1518 bytes packets Tx Bytes Monitoring Tx bytes packets Tx Packets Monitoring Tx packets Tx MulticastPkts Monitoring Tx multicast packets Tx BroadcastPkts Monitoring Tx broadcast packets 193 lt gt History Control This table is for controlling the ETH History table History Control 1 is for controlling ETH History table 1 History Control 2 is for controlling ETH History table 2 etc Type in the Requested value and Interval sec and then click on New to create a History Control entry Up to 10 History Control entries can be created To modify an entry click on the index to select the entry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete Remote Monitoring History Control Select Typel History Con
54. Parameter None 5 3 125 show vlan protocol base Description Display protocol based VLAN table Syntax show vlan ethertype Parameter None 5 3 126 show vlan translation one to one Description Display one to one VLAN translation table Syntax show vlan translation one to one Parameter None 5 3 127 show vlan translation many to one Description Display many to one VLAN translation table Syntax show vlan translation many to one Parameter None 5 3 128 telnet Description Telnet to a destination if you re connecting to the DSLAM through its console port this command is not provided Syntax telnet lt target address gt Parameter Name Description target address IPV4 address or hostname Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 239 5 3 129 traceroute Description Syntax Parameter Trace route and not use ICMP ECHO instead of UDP datagrams traceroute lt target address gt no_icmp Name Description target address IPV4 address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 240 5 4 Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Configure execution mode 5 4 1 access list Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 2 account add Description Syntax Parameter Go to access list execution mode from Configure mode access list None Add new acc
55. Running Config D TFTP Server ip 72 16 10 241 File Name oonfig Get File Fail to Get File Database Configuration DB Config Select B import File Load Remote Config to Running Contig y TFTP Server pp 172 16 10 28 File Name confiz Get File 44 C Export File Put Running Config to Remote TFTP Server Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to export Then click on Put File button Database Configuration DB Contig Select C Export File Put Running Contig To Remote TFTP Server y TFTP Server p 172 16 10241 File Name 0nfiz1 _PutFile TFTP put file successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select CjExport File Put Running Contig To Remote TFTP Server y TFTP Server p 172 16 10241 File Name oontigl Put File TFTP put file fail Database Configuration DB Config Select C Export File Put Running Config To Remote TFTP Server y TFTP Server p 172 16 1028 File Name contigl Put File 45 D Save Running Config to Flash System Config Click on the drop down list and select partition and then click on Write_Running button to write running configuration to Flash Database Configuration DB Contig Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config y rte flash at Partition D Wirte_Running Write running config to Flash successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select D Save Running Config to Flash
56. T acc Frm 2 ALL Frame y Isolation ON y Modify Query giga gt la ADSL PVC CONFIGURATION STATIC VLAN GIGA Trunk Bridge Setup Label Description Mode Click on the drop down list and specify the trunk port to be an Uplink or User especially for system stacking VID Type in the default port VLAN ID Valid value is 1 4094 Max MAC ee maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the giga bridge port 1 VLAN setting for the traffic Includes three drop down lists Pri 0 7 Set the default VLAN priority level UnTagged Tagged Select to untag tag the outgoing upstream direction for trunk bridge ports packets If UnTagged is selected a double tagged packet will leave single tagged the VLAN outer most VLAN tag is removed and a single tagged packet will leave untagged no Stack Stack Disable Enable N 1 VLAN stacking our system adds the default VLAN tag to all the incoming frames through this port Note When an untagged frame enters the IDL 4802 it is assigned the default PVID of the ingress incoming bridge port and become a single tagged frame no matter VLAN stacking is enabled or not Set Ingress ON check if the VID of the incoming frame is in the member set If not in the Ingress member set block the frame Set Ingress OFF Ingress filter disabled Acc Frm Click on the drop down list and select to accept ALL Frame only VLAN tagged frame or only Untagged frame O
57. Telco 50 Cable x 4 Console Cable x 1 Rack mounting Ear x 2 Screw Package x 2 Connect Tenon x 4 RJ 45 Cable for Fan x 1 If any of above items are damaged or missing please contact your dealer immediately 1 3 Application Perfect solution for NSP Network Service Provider to offer broadband services The PLANET IDL 4802 offers the benefit of high performance to central office co location and MTU Multi Tenant Unit MDU Multi Dwelling Unit markets It provides service of broadband data over existing copper wires without affecting the conventional voice service by 48 subscriber ports with built in POTS splitter The PLANET IP DSLAM is the perfect solution for NSP with cost effective and high value central management capability Application 1 For Communit NSP Central Office Community Internet gt Ciad IDL 4802 100Base TX UTP See ADSL 2 2 1 Telco 50 Cable A hb _ 1 000Base SX LX Fiber optic Application 2 For Building Building Internet 10F Control Room C PSTN gt 0m ADSL 2 2 Telco 50 Cable V cf 1000 Base SX LX Fiberoptic 1 4 Outlook 1 4 1 Front Panel 48 Port DSLAM Switch Y PLANET 101 4802 NS 1178711085921 2540439404040 sto 000000000000000000000000 sm 000000000000000000000000 HEEN 900000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 IDL 4802
58. To value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click Query on this button to retrieve To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click Delete on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or cica y cca 7 GIGA bridge port Source MAC Type in the MAC Address of the coming source Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN Priority Out priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 119 lt gt MAC Destination VLAN MAC Destination Priority Remark PRI Remark SMAC Destination y No From 1 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 2 Destination mac 00 00 oo foo mm Priority Out zl Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup MAC Destination Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view No From To value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click Query on this button to retrieve To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click Delete on this button to delete aca zl ecm y Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or e cess GIGA bridge port Destination MAC Type in the
59. Update This option allows you to ftp get the firmware from a server and write to flash for updating the system firmware From the Maintenance menu click on Firmware Update The following page is displayed Firmware Update 16 10 41 21 share OK vmlinux_4802 0 736805 Firmware Partition Select Partition 2 y Once system has 2 versions an operator can use Partition Select from 1 to 2 vice versa e g Parition changes from version 4 ato version B b 0 73805 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it Current Version Firmware Update Label Description Once you have typed in the parameter values click on this button to start firmware update Remote FTP Server IP Type in the IP address of the FTP server Firmware Update Server User Name Type in the ftp user name Server Password Type in the ftp password File Name Type in the firmware path and filename max 31 characters Firmware Update This field shows current status of firmware update process Status Select firmware memory partition Partition 1 or 2 if you change to the other partition not current partition the system will restart immediately Firmware Partition Select This section displays the partition information including firmware version updating date and status active or not
60. Version 2 The IDL 4802 provides two firmware memory partitions If you want to change the firmware partition for booting use the following commands if you change to the non active partition system will restart immediately enable go to enable mode configure go to configuration mode firmware partition lt number gt select partition 1 or 2 for next power on 50 For Web On the menu tree click on Maintenance gt Firmware Update The Firmware Update page is displayed Once you have entered all the necessary values click on Firmware Update button to start updating the firmware Firmware Update 172 16 10 41 21 share HOOK vmlinux _u4802_0 73B05 Firmware Partition Select Partition 2 y Once system has 2 versions an operator can use Partition Select from 1 to 2 vice versa e q Par tion changes from version 4 ato version B b Current Version 0 73505 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it Label Description Once you have typed in the parameter values click on this button to start firmware update Remote FTP Server IP Type in the IP address of the FTP server Firmware Update Server User Name Type in the ftp user name Server Password Type in the ftp password File Name Type in the firmware filename Firmware Upda
61. al A Seet isee o o TTT EN EZ E a a ES C Im mm Im Seet see o e TTT seet isee FO EN EN Fi Ste seet Elf seee A 129 Rate Limit Poicer Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Page 01 of 4 D Click on this drop down list and select a page to be displayed Select Select the checkbox when you want to create modify delete this entry Share mode All the bridge ports which bind to the share mode policer profile will share the same Leaky Bucket defined by the CIR EIR parameters So in Share mode system only creates one Leaky Bucket for all the binding Share Mode bridge ports No Share mode Every bridge port which bind to the non share policer profile will have its own Leaky Bucket Single Single Leaky Bucket For SLB there is one controlling parameter CIR LB Mode Dual Dual Leaky Bucket For DLB there are two controlling parameters CIR and EIR CIR Committed Information Rate 1536 1G bits per second controls the number of tokens in the first bucket CBS bucket EIR Excess Information Rate 1536 1G bits per second controls the number of tokens in the second bucket EBS bucket 1 LBS 1 Leaky Bucket Size The unit is millisecond This parameter ranges from 1 to 1024 The first bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter 241 BS ge Leaky Bucket Size The unit is mi
62. all lt port gt vc Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 63 show interface xdsl all lt port gt vlan Description Display VLAN information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt vlan Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 64 show interface bridge Description Display All interface Bridge information Syntax show interface bridge Parameter None 5 3 65 show interface counter Description Display All interface Ethernet packet counter Syntax show interface counter Parameter None 227 5 3 66 show interface gigabit lt port gt bridge Description Display Bridge information of all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces or by Gigabit Ethernet port Syntax show interface gigabit lt port gt bridge Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Optional 5 3 67 show interface gigabit lt port gt counter Description Display Gigabit Ethernet counter of all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces or by Gigabit Ethernet port Syntax show interface gigabit lt port gt counter Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Optional 5 3 68 show interface giga
63. by console or EMS during maintenance Resolving Problems Indicated Through LEDs This section describes what to do to solve problems indicated by LEDs on the system front panel Problems Indicated by LEDs LED Activity Problem Action SYS Not lit even There is a power up Troubleshoot the DSLAM for though DSLAM Problem with the system power up problems see Red Self test failed There is a Replace the IDL 4802 functional problem with the system ALM Red Major alarm set See next section Red Flash Major and Minor alarm set See next section Yellow Minor alarm set See next section GBE1 GBE2 Not lit even No link Troubleshoot the DSLAM for If SFP though DSLAM fiber optics problems interface is is powered up activated Resolving Problems Indicated Through Alarms Alarms of the system are viewed through CLI Web GUI If an alarm indicates a problem refer to section troubleshooting procedures Troubleshooting Procedures for the IDL 4802 When you follow a troubleshooting procedure start from the first step of the procedure If the first step does not solve the problem proceed to the next step keep going through the steps until the problem is solved Use the following table to find out the appropriate procedure for troubleshooting the listed problems 361 List of Troubleshooting Procedures Type of problem Procedure Number IDL 4802 power up problems Fan card power up proble
64. configure capable intf conf Ethernet Interface Ethernet Interface configure capable ethernet intf conf ATM Bridge ATM Bridge configuration capable bridge atm conf ATM Description ATM Description configuration capable atm desc conf ADSL config ADSL line configuration capable adsl intf conf IPOA config IPoA routed mode configuration capable ipoa intf conf Bridge Bridge configuration capable bridge eth conf Access List ACL configuration capable acl conf Service Profile User Line service profile configuration capable mm LL ee Le eS ST J ST S SS service profile Spectrum Profile User Line spectrum profile configuration capable spectrum profile Alarm Profile User Line alarm profile configuration alarm profile capable Tca Profile User Line tca profile configuration capable tca profile IGMP ACL Profile IGMP ACL profile configuration capable igmpacl profile Rate Limit Profile Rate Limit Policer profile configuration capable rate limit profile Priority List Priority List configuration capable prio conf Getting help The user can get help in two ways The first is by using the help command The user can also enter a question mark at each position in the command The displayed result depends on the execution mode and previous input Terminal Key Function 206 Following is the list of a
65. data ADSL Carrier Data Port 2 zl Type Loap E cain C Query The LOAD formula load value 1 256 The bit LOAD distribution over Downstream passband Near END ojajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajaja ojasje 7zfjajajojojioi0 11 10 11 11 2 2 a 2 0 0 5 5 14 D0 1 14 1a OO 515 15 15 15 15 15 15 5 45 15 15 ss 5 sc sj 45 5 15 45 15 15 151 15115 DD DEIER EE boone DI Je s e 5 s Q O 15 1511541541 151154151154 15 5 5 151 1541 151 15 151 151 154 is sjsjs5sjs s5j5 Q Q 15 151154151154 1541541154 15 f 15 f 154 151 154 Ss spas sy as spy spy 15 15 44 15 1151151 2 1511511511541151 15 f 14 15 15 15 15 14 15 15 15 15 14 15 15 15 Mw 00s sess eee ss eee Be ee eee BEE aos bse sees eee ss 6555555655558 Q O 515 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 5 15 15 15 mos ose seen eee ss eee Be SESS Q QO 15 14 15 15 14 15 14 15 14 15 14 15 14 15 144 5 15 14 14 15 14 14 15 14 15 14 14 15 14 15 14 14 15 14 14 15 14 15 14 14 14 0 Q 15 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 MD 14 la 41 5 14 13 BG BLL 13 1 13 12112 12 12 12 22 11 11 11 1 n 9 9 The LOAD formula load value 1 256 The bit load distribution over Upstream passband Far END ojajajajajajajajs9jai 11 12 15 15 14 14 14 14 5 5 1515 15 15 15 14 14 fa f11 9 ojajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajaja E E BiG GG G G G G G afl DLG G Gb G G G G A G G G G G G G G G o
66. destination MAC deny access list dstmac list None 314 5 12 5 dstip Description Specify destination IP address of packets to filter Show specified destination IP deny access list entry Delete specified destination IP deny access list entry Syntax dstip lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la ip lt ipv4 address gt lt netmask gt dstip lt numbers list dstip lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Destination IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional 5 12 6 dstip list Description Display destination IP deny access list Syntax dstip list Parameter None 315 5 12 7 ethertype Description Specify Ether Type of packets to filter Show specified Ether Type deny access list entry Delete specified Ether Type deny access list entry Syntax ethertype lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la type lt ethertype gt
67. down list and select the channel index range IP CHANNEL MAP Options are Channel 001 032 Channel 033 064 Channel 225 256 All select Click on this checkbox to select all channels in this page at one time This is convenient for quick value assignment Type the IGMP group IP address here for quick assignment Click on Quickly IP Assign Assign button to put the value into the table Then you can modify parts of the IP addresses directly in the table Type the IGMP group IP address here for quick assignment Click on Quickly VID Assign Assign button to put the value into the table Click on this button to apply the parameter values you have just entered But Assign these values haven t been really saved in the database You must click on Create to save the values Once the setting has been saved you cannot modify the values You must delete the channel and then create again 140 Select Click on this checkbox to select the channel you want to create delete or assign values You can type the IGMP group address here and then click on Create button IP Address to save Valid values 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The range of addresses from 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 is reserved for the use of routing protocols and other low level topology discovery or maintenance protocols Query Click on this button to display current channels in the profile Create Click on this button to create new channels I
68. forwarding database The forwarding table will reveal the information of MAC addresses that are learned or statically configured on a specific bridge port From the Bridge menu click on Forwarding and then TP Forwarding DB The following page is displayed Forward Table Aging Time 10 1000000 Sec B 00 Modify Ho From 1 To 15 No range from 1to6144 Query TP Forwarding DB Label Description Type in the aging time in seconds An entry will be removed from the FDB Aging Time aged out if the device does not transmit for a specified period of time the aging time Modify Click on this button to submit the modification of Aging Time Select the range of entry number in the forwarding database to be No From To e displayed Quer Once you have selected the entry number click on this button to get y most recent status of MAC addresses forwarding 134 4 2 5 2 Forwarding Static This option allows you to configure the static MAC address forwarding entries on a specific bridge port The setting of static MAC address takes effect on egress direction of bridge port From the Bridge menu click on Forwarding and then Forwarding Static The following page is displayed No From 1 To Forwarding Static 1 No range form 1 to 512 _Query _Detete NextNo 2 such OOO eo o po VD 1 Process Pass zl _Create Forwarding Static Label Descripti
69. gigabit la one to one reserved priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 2 C tag replaced vlan trans vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit la one to one replaced lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 3 Stacking and C tag reserved vlan trans vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit la one to one stacking lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 4 Stacking and C tag replaced vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit la one to one stacking lt uplink VLAN ID gt ctag replaced lt c tag VLAN ID gt lt c tag PRIO ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt user port VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt uplink VLAN ID gt Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt PRIO ID gt Replaced the priority level of packets out through the uplink port with the specified value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 287 5 4 142 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID g
70. gt adsl carrier ne ds tss Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of near end tss downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds tss Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 50 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl channel Description Syntax Parameter Display xDSL line channel information by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl channel Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 51 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl failure Description Syntax Parameter Display xDSL failure by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl failure Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 52 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line Description Syntax Parameter Display xDSL line status by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 224 5 3 53 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line config Description Display xDSL line configuration inform
71. interfaces and then the corresponding data of those interfaces will be listed in Data Table Click on the radio button to select a circuit and modify the parameter values in the Configuration area Then click on Create to create a new entry or Modify to change the 68 setting of an existing entry You can click on Delete to remove an entry Click on Query to get current data whenever you want to make sure actual status of the system In some pages there is the Global setup area often with a Set button on top of a page After fill up the fields in this area you have to click on Set to save the modification Also the Configuration area is often located at the top inside the Data Table Global setup area IP Routes sama 0 1 a Next No 2 ADD Next Destination Het Mask Gateway Page 1 of2 y Delete In some pages you modify the data directly in the entry fields remember to click on the check box or radio button to select the entry before you click on Modify button thus the new values can really be saved into the system Global setup area DSL Line Identify DSL Global Configuration PPP Service Name PPP Service Name Check model Disabled y DSLAM Name IPDSLAM DSLAM Name mode Customer y Dhcp Mode Relay OFF y ID Select Circuit ID y Circuit ID Type DEFAULT y Remote ID Type DEFAULT y sa DSL Line ID Configuration Port 01 12 y Pvc y Query Modify IPDSLAM 001 000 00035 IPDSLAM 004 IPDSLAM
72. is Router IP 0 0 0 0 But PCs with Windows OS do not receive this kind of packets So user can assign an IP address here for proxy mode IGMP general query packet reference Create Click on this button to create a new entry Delete To delete an entry select the checkbox of the entry and then click on Delete button 139 4 2 7 2 IGMP Profile This option allows you to configure the IGMP ACL Access Control List profile This profile defines the IGMP multicast channels which are allowed to join for each ADSL port That is a multicast stream will be copied to an ADSL port only if that multicast stream is registered in the ACL profile that is bound to this ADSL port The maximum number of IGMP multicast channels in an ACL profile is 256 Note that the same multicast channel can be existed concurrently in two or more ACL profiles The ACL profile will be referred to only when ACL mode is enabled in the IGMP Configuration page From the Bridge menu click on IGMP and then IGMP Profile The following page is displayed IGMP Profile page gt IGMP ACL Profile IGMP PROFILE i FILE Profile el 01 D IP CHANNEL MAP 1 Channel_001 032 e Create Delete All select Quickly IP Assign 224 i f Quickly YID Assign Assign ch IGMP ACL Profile Configuration Label Description Profile ID Click on this drop down list and specify the profile ID Valid value is 01 48 Click on this drop
73. is allowed 1 5 Technical Specifications 48 Port ADSL 2 2 IP DSLAM IDL 4802 IDL 4802 48 Hardware Specification Case 1 5U high box type with a rack mountable enclosure Uplink 2 x RJ 45 10 100 1000Base T 2 x SFP 1000Base T SX LX EX ZX LHX MGMT 1 x RJ 45 10 100Base TX Poris Console 1 x RJ 45 RS 232 serial port 9600 8 N 1 LINE 2 x RJ 21 connectors PHONE 2 x RJ 21 connectors Fan 2 x RJ 45 HK 1 x RJ 50 1x SYS LED 1 x ALMLED LED Indicators 2 x Uplink LEDs 48 x ADSL LEDs Software Specification Compliant with ADSL standard ANSI T1 413 issue 2 G dmt ITU G 992 1 Glite ITU G 992 2 G hs ITU G 994 1 Capable of ADSL2 standard G dmt bis ITU G 992 3 Capable of ADSL2 standard G dmt bisplus ITU G 992 5 Subscriber interface with built in POTS splitter Downstream DMT data rate up to 25 Mbps Upstream DMT data rate up to 3 Mbps Annex M Distance up to 18 kft 8 PVCs per xDSL port DHCP forward DHCP relay agent PPPOE relay IPSec L2TP PPTP VPN pass through function PPPoA to PPPoE inter working Bridge Function Supports IPv4 packet Supports IEEE802 1d Ethernet bridge function between trunk Ether port and ATM VCs Supports static source MAC table provisioning automatic source MAC learning and block duplicate ones Supports 4K static MAC address table 128 MAC address per x DSL port Supports IEEE80
74. lt VLAN ID gt disable Name Description VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory VLAN ID 306 5 9 14 vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 9 15 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority Description Set VLAN memberset priority specify priority level or reserved the original priority tag or untag enable or disable port isolation Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority lt prio ID gt reserved tag untag isolation disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 9 16 vlan list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan list Parameter None 307 5 10 ADSL Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the ADSL Config mode 5 10 1 line mode carrier Description Syntax Parameter Set Clear xDSL line carrier line mode carrier on off oninit None 5 10 2 line mode diagnostic Description Syntax Parameter Set Clear xDSL line diagnostics line mode diagnostic init off None 5 10 3 line mode force 13 Description Syntax Parameter 5 10 4 li
75. only forwarded between enabled ports eliminating any possible network loops Once a stable network topology has been established all devices listen for Hello BPDUs transmitted from the Root Bridge If a device does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval Max Age the device assumes that the link to the root bridge is down This device then will negotiate with other devices to re establish a valid network topology STP assigns five port states see the following table to eliminate packet looping A device port is not allowed to go directly from blocking state to forwarding state so as to eliminate transient loops Port States Port State Description Disabled STP is disabled default Blocking Only configuration and management BPDUs are received and processed Listening All BPDUs are received and processed L All BPDUs are received and processed Information frames are submitted to earning the learning process but not forwarded All BPDUs are received and processed All information frames are received and forwarded Forwarding 104 4 2 3 1 Protocol This page allows you to setup the STP Bridge From the Bridge menu click on Spanning Tree and then Protocol The following page is displayed STP Disabled Enabled Version RSTP stp Priority 32768 HelloTime Modify Spanning Tree Protocol 2 ForwardDelay 15 MaxAge 20 The maxage hellotime and forwardd
76. option82 circuit Description Set DHCP Option82 Circuit ID type default type is lt DSLAM name gt lt circuit number gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt or customer defined type Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 circuit default customer Parameter None 5 4 20 dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name Description Set DSLAM name Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Set DSLAM name max length 15 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 21 dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name cluster Description Set DSLAM name by Cluster name Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name cluster Parameter None 5 4 22 dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name customer Description Set DSLAM name by customer defined Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name customer Parameter None 246 5 4 23 dsl line identify dhcp option82 sub Description Set DHCP Option82 sub mode send Circuit ID send Remote ID send Both Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 sub circuit remote both Parameter None 5 4 24 dsl line identify dhcp option82 remote Description Set Remote ID type as Default Line ID Line Description Line phone number Customer default type is lt DSLAM name gt lt bridge port index gt customer type means the customer defined type Syntax dsl line identify dhcp option82 remote default line id
77. packets are classified before they re sent through the policer Color Aware Color blind mode the packets are directed through the entire policer regardless of their color Color Field There are two fields you can select for determining the packe s input color the VLAN priority bits within the Ethernet header or the DSCP field within the IP header This parameter defines the action for non conforming packets You can choose Tag Packet Mode or Discard If Tag is chosen then all the packets will be marked as red in the Color field rather than be discarded Type in the green color value that is used when determining a packet s input color Green Value for Color Aware mode or remarking a packet s output color as green Valid value is 0 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 63 for DSCP color field Type in the yellow color value that is used when determining a packet s input color Yellow Value for Color Aware mode or remarking a packet s output color as yellow Valid value is 0 7 for VLAN Priority color field or O 63 for DSCP color field Type in the red color value that is used when remarking a packet s output color as red Valid value is 0 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 63 for DSCP color field Red Value 132 4 2 4 4 Priority Queue Mapping This web page is used to select SPQ WFQ WRR queuing mechanism and to setup the mapping between VLAN priority levels and system internal queues From t
78. template unmask xdsl lineconf xdsl profile xdsl adminstatus dsl dentify trust pvc vlan bridge igmp acl filter priority remark priority regen ethernet policer None 5 4 61 port template template port Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 62 priority list Description Syntax Parameter Select the template line port and pasted line port copy configuration from template port port template template port lt port gt paste port lt port gt Name Description lt port gt XDSL Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory Go to Priority list execution mode from Configure mode priority list None 257 5 4 63 priority queue atm priority Description Set ATM interface priority queue mapping Syntax priority queue atm priority lt prio ID gt queue lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt number gt Priority queue value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 64 priority queue atm queue0 weight Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 0 Syntax priority queue atm queue0 weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 0 Valid values 1 255 Default value 10 Type Mandatory 5 4 65 priority queue atm queue1 weight Description Set weight value of ATM
79. the current line CTRL w Kill the word behind point using white space as a word boundary The killed text is saved on the kill ring CTRL y Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point CTRL s Terminal will not response to what the operator key in CTRL q Back to normal mode from terminal not responding mode CTRL z Exit current execution mode 207 Notation Conventions The notation conventions for the parameter syntax of each CLI command are as follows e Parameters enclosed in are optional e Parameter values are separated by a vertical bar only when one of the specified values can be used e Parameter values are enclosed in when you must use one of the values specified About String type Parameters Some commands have string type parameters When you type in the values of these parameters you must be careful not to use the keyword that is actually a part of some command For example account add default will cause a syntax mistake since default is the keyword of the command igmp default and some other commands Therefore it is recommended to add when you have to use the command keyword as the parameter value In this way the keyword will be regarded as a common string For example account add default 208 5 1 Global Commands The Global commands can be used in all execution modes 5 1 1 bye Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 2 cluster Exit bye Non
80. tx_single_collision txrx_frames_64 txrx_frames_127 txrx_frames_255 txrx_frames_511 txrx_frames_ 1023 txrx_frames_1518 index lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Source index in statistic table Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 266 5 4 88 rmon event lt index gt community Description Set RMON event community Syntax rmon event lt index gt community lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt RMON event community Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 89 rmon event lt index gt delete Description Delete RMON event entry Syntax rmon event lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 90 rmon event lt index gt description Description Description for the RMON event Syntax rmon event lt index gt description lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt Event description Valid values string type value max 31
81. xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt SNMP target port Valid values 1 65535 Default value 162 Type Mandatory 5 4 111 snmp target lt name gt delete Description Delete SNMP target tag list Syntax snmp target lt name gt delete Parameter Name Description lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 274 5 4 112 snmp target lt name gt tag list Description Set SNMP target tag list Syntax snmp target lt name gt tag list lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt SNMP target tag list Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 113 snmp target lt name gt version Description Set SNMP target trap version to V1 or V2C Syntax snmp target lt name gt version v1 v2c Parameter Name Description lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 114 sntp polling interval Description Set SNTP polling interval Syntax sntp polling interval lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Polling interval in seconds Valid values 60 65535 Default value 600 Type Mandatory 275 5 4 115 sntp server address Descript
82. 00 00035 IPDSLAM 002 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 003 000 00035 IPDSLAM 003 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 004 000 00035 IPDSLAM 004 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 005 000 00035 IPOSLAM 005 1 FALSE y IPDSLAM 006 000 00035 IPDSLAM 006 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 007 000 00035 IPDSLAM 007 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 008 000 00035 IPDSLAM 008 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 009 000 00035 IPDSLAM 009 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 010 000 00035 IPDSLAM 010 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 011 000 00035 IPDSLAM 011 1 False 29 IPDSLAM 012 000 00035 IPDSLAM 012 1 FALSE sl DSL Line Identify Setup Label Description DSL Global Configuration PPP Service Name Type in the PPPoE service name to add PPP Service Name Enable the system will check whether the PPPoE service names from the PPPoE server and client are the same If not the same the PPP Check mode connection between server and client will not be established Disable the system will not check the PPPoE service name DSLAM Name Type in name of the DSLAM when DSLAM Name mode is set to Customer DSLAM Name mode Select the DSLAM name to be customer defined or cluster name Domain name NE name DHCP Mode Click on this drop down list and select OFF ON to disable enable DHCP relay function ID Select Click on this drop down list and select the Relay Agent Information that is inserted to the forwarding packets Options are Circuit ID Remote ID or Both 136 Circuit ID Type Click on th
83. 002 000 00035 IPDSLAM 005 IPDSLAM 003 000 00035 IPDSLAM 006 IPDSLAM 004 000 00035 IPDSLAM 007 IPDSLAM 005 000 00035 IPDSLAM 008 Modify values here 69 4 1 System 4 1 1 System Information The System Information page the default page you ll see after you login the web configuration tool contains information about the user access level current system date and time current boot configuration partition system MAC address system HW SW FW version web configuration software version supported subscriber line type AnnexA or AnnexB GBE interface status and LED status SYS and ALM From the System menu click on System Info The following page is displayed System Information ACCESS LOGIN Access Level System Date FW Boot Active DB Current DB Super user 2007 10 22 Partition 2 Partition 2 Partition 2 SYSTEM MAC Bridge MAC Gigal MAC Giga2 MAC D0 30 4F 71 1F F5 00 30 4F 71 10 FO 00 30 4F 71 1F FC SYSTEM VERSION Hardware Firmware Software Web Circuit 1 48 B 0 74B08 0 74B08 Uc 09 21d AnnexA IGA STATUS Gigal Giga2 LA SYS LED ALM LED Config Enabled Config Enabled Config Disabled D Q 70 4 1 2 Board IP Setup This option allows you to configure the Gigabit Ethernet interface and out band management interface including the management IP setting DHCP configuration HTTP port setting etc From the System menu click on Board IP Setup The following page is displayed Board IP Setup Modify
84. 1 wv Once system has 2 versions an operator can use Partition Select from 1 to 2 vice versa e g Par tion changes from version 4 a to version B b 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it 52 Software Introduction 3 1 General Overview The software architecture of the IDL 4802 is shown in the figure below lt can be divided into three layers the management layer the OAM amp P layer and the firmware layer gt 23 SNMP Management 22 Agent Interface 3 el A A Message o Dispatch H SS Kl E 2 o Command Dispatch ADSLI2 2 vo Interface Service Service Controller Software Package Integrated development tools and API JoaAe SJEMUI y Management Software Model As in the figure CLI shell SNMP agent and WEB server are in the top most layer management layer of the system software and offering OAM amp P function of the DSLAM based on the conceptual management features as follows e Configuration Management e Performance Management e Fault Management The IDL 4802 uses flash memory as the database DB to store system configuration parameters alarms and events The firmware layer includes ADSL drivers Memory and I O control etc 53 3 1 1 Features of Management Interface e Support CLI SNMP v1 v2c and web based GUI management
85. 174 224 255 a 174 174 174 174 175 174 174 174 174 175 474 173 173 172 174 173 172 174 173 174 174 174 174 174 174 174 174 174 174 170 256 237 171 171 174 174 174 173 173 173 173 172 472 472 471 172 172 472 471 172 171 163 100 120 169 171 471 120 120 170 172 120 120 171 239 319 170 171 170 171 170 471 170 172 172 172 172 472 171 472 171 473 471 472 474 172 472 172 471 171 472 171 172 171 171 172 169 171 320351 170 170 170 170 169 16 163 169 169 169 167 167 167 166 162 165 166 165 165 164 164 164 163 162 162 163 161 161 161 161 162 163 352 305 162 162 161 161 161 165 161 161 161 164 165 165 162 165 165 165 164 164 165 165 164 164 165 166 167 166 165 165 165 164 167 165 3 415 167 164 165 165 165 164 164 162 164 161 161 162 161 162 161 161 159 165 164 165 161 161 163 162 161 160 160 161 155 155 157 15 Al6 447 152 159 157 160 160 153 180 160 160 159 161 161 160 162 156 157 159 153 161 157 159 159 159 159 159 160 160 161 153 162 18 161 m 180 159 161 162 159 161 161 180 180 159 160 159 159 153 156 159 157 156 161 160 161 160 153 160 153 155 151 156 157 157 152 155 30 511 157 154 152 154 150 151 14 150 151 153 150 151 149 151 149 149 149 1 144 149 14 149 144 15 147 109 145 109 105 19 1 6 157 Carrier Type TSS SNR ONS HLIN Hoei 255 195 190 191 190 190 194 179 170 166 175 175 173 172 174 180 176 190 174 191 179 179 185 182 182 105 192 191 104 185 1839 191 194 195 192 191 190 190 199 191 190 191 199 190 191 190
86. 192 195 190 189 189 191 190 190 190 190 195 19 191 192 194 191 191 191 gedet eisereen 20 AM 226 192 226 226 224 226 226 192 192 183 193 134 190 im 176 176 226 226 12 10 190 190 190 19 183 1 12 1 1 12 190 173 190 173 13 19 173 173 173 173 176 173 179 173 178 173 176 176 176 176 176 173 176 173 176 173 176 176 173 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 176 173 176 176 176 176 176 173 176 173 176 176 176 176 173 176 173 173 10 19 10 19 12 190 12 190 19 190 12 190 i 12 10 im 12 12 12 10 12 190 12 12 12 im im i 12 12 190 12 12 12 12 190 12 1 19 12 12 im 12 12 12 12 12 12 19 12 190 12 19 12 12 12 im im 23 195 14 190 173 22 13 i 190 173 HlinUpstream Scale 48854 HlinDownstream Scale 38568 Carrier Type TSS SNR QN HN Hoei 158 rrier Type TSS SNR ONT HLIN HLOG 251 105 776 776 76 63 252 13 39 3 35 272 3 2 5 28 A 0 46 5 61 M 79 397 B 105 113 12 100 137 14 152 1025 1023 1023 1023 1023 1025 1023 1023 1023 1025 1025 1023 1023 1025 1025 1025 1023 1025 1025 1025 1025 1023 1025 1025 1025 1023 1025 1025 1025 1025 1025 1025 The HLOG formula 6 value 10 dB Real values in dB for each carrier over the Downstream passband Far END am 450 490 490 5050 50 50 50 500 50 50 560 5600 560 500 50 610 620 50 50 510 0 20 250 201 210 20 190 17 1600 15 140 140 10 120 120 120 110 110 100 100 100 100 oi 20 0 wm mo o e SHO o e e e e o o e DD a 3 slselsielelelalesisisiselgs 8 s s
87. 2 1d Ethernet bridge function between trunk Ether port and ATM VCs Supports Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP for the trunk interfaces per IEEE 802 1w Support Link Aggregation in IEEE 802 3ad for 2 GBE links to be aggregated together as a logical link Support both LACP protocol dynamic for load sharing and failover in case of loss of Ethernet link VLAN Function IEEE 802 1q Port based Protocol based VLAN 512 non stacked VLAN ID simultaneously ranging from 1 to 4095 VLAN stacking and VLAN cross connect IP Spoofing prevention 20 MAC anti Spoofing Port isolation functionality Static VLAN group and membership provisioning Multicast Function IP multicast forwarding Complies with RFC2684 bridged payload encapsulation mode Up to 256 multicast groups and 512 copies simultaneously Up to 48 profile based Multicast Access Control Limit maximum number of IGMP groups joined per bridge port IGMP snooping proxy per IGMP v1 v2 and v3 IGMP proxy and IGMP snooping Selection Supports Layer 2 frame filtering based on MAC and Ether Type Supports Layer 3 filtering based on IP Protocol and Port number IEEE 802 1X authentication QoS Control the bandwidth occupied by broadcast multicast and unknown unicast flooding Rate limit profile binding per bridge port Three Color Marking TCM policer Ethernet rate limit per bridge port ToS type of service
88. 2 state the total reduction is the sum of all reductions of L2 che Request e at transition of LO to L2 state and L2 power trims Value range is 0 15 dB Direction DS downstream US upstream Message Type in the minimum rate of the message based overhead that shall be 149 maintained by the ATU in upstream downstream direction Value range is 4 28k bit s Noise Margin Type in the Noise Margin values Min Minimum noise margin 0 0 31 0 51 1db default 0 0 Tar Target noise margin 0 0 31 0 51 1db default 6 0 Max Maximum noise margin 0 0 31 0 51 1db default 51 1 Modify Delete Click on this button to submit the modification Click on this button to delete a profile Query Click on this button to display the profiles OP Mode N Click on this button to view modify allowed ADSL modes of operation for the profile The following page is displayed An OP Mode is supported if the check box is selected Modify Status Complete modems will re train after you click on Apply button ADSL Spectrum Profile 2 OP Mode Modify Status Complete Apply BACK TT fetog 9s2 1_ _Temtsdn_NenOverlapped lv TT saz8 982 3 Y AlDIgtal_NonOverlpped T a 6t32J992 41AlDigta_Nonowerlapped aime z 1 ged NonOverapped steen zm tee seg TT s b58 852 6_M_Pots_Extend_US_NenOverlapped ADSL Spectrum RFI ADSL Spectrum Carrier Mask J To be continued
89. 337 5 14 14 srcmac list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 15 tos Description Syntax Parameter Show source MAC priority list sremac list None Specify ToS IP Precedence of packets to remark vlan priority Show ToS IP Precedence priority list entry Disable ToS IP Precedence priority list entry tos lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la precedence lt tos gt tos lt number gt list tos lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt tos gt Incoming Type of Service Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 338 5 14 16 tos list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 17 vlanid Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 18 vlanid list Description Syntax Parameter Show ToS IP Precedence priority list tos list None Specify VLAN ID of packets to remark VLAN priority Show VLAN id priority list entry Disable VLAN id priority list entry vlanid lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc
90. 394 415 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32760 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 216 447 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 4ag 479 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 490 511 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32768 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 The TSS formula tss value 1 32768 The Transmit Spectrum Shaping for the Upstream direction as exchanged at init Far END cone 0 h 2 3 45 6 2 8 9010 11 12 1s it 15 1617 18 19 E Et 200 00 27 28 029 30 31 0 31 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32 65 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 carrier Type Tss snr ONT HI
91. 4 25 36 or 37 48 at the same time ADSL Performance Statistics More Port 01 12 port zl ALL interval I C Day Today 7 Ze 45 Min Current y fo Clearing current interval PM Clear PM Portl TCA PROFILE 15 Min Previous PM number between 1 and 96 202 ADSL PM Statistics Label Description Click on the drop down list and select the port range Options are More Port 01 12 13 24 37 48 This drop down list is available only when All is selected in the Port drop down list Click on the drop down list and select a line port number 1 48 Port You can also select All and then click on More Port to select a port range to view the data of twelve ports at the same time All Interval When you select to view a single port PM data you can click on this checkbox to display the data of all intervals Query Click on this button to get most recent data Clear PM Click on this button to clear current PM data of the port you select LOS Loss of Signal LOF Loss of Frame LOM Loss of Margin LPR Loss of Power only for Far End LOL Loss of Link only for Near End ES Errored Seconds SES Severely Errored Seconds UAS Unavailable Seconds Re Initialize Modem Re initialization events only for Near End Initialize fail s Modem Failed Initialization events only for Near End User Cell CU Delineate Cell CD User Total Cell Count only for Near End De
92. 405 557 573 405 557 405 573 405 573 573 419 573 405 590 405 590 419 573 419 590 405 590 419 590 419 GDI 40 603 40 50 40 41 50 40 Gn 40 ME AS A A2 825 S4 e a ss 185 ON 1ER 2A 482 482 691 496 405 405 511 405 496 495 526 511 541 525 541 395 541 557 405 557 590 419 590 430 430 625 442 455 455 662 42 42 406 511 525 541 394 590 419 009 455 469 492 511 541 557 573 442 469 541 419 625 496 557 419 495 541 430 495 469 50 42 34 0 The GAIN formula gain value 1 512 The gain allocation over the Upstream passband Far END 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 556 444 494 457 465 524 505 556 540 466 451 524 479 453 459 466 491 529 405 527 447 49 515 556 592 ajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajajaja 160 4 3 2 4 OP Data This option allows you to view the ADSL line channel operational data and carrier data From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then OP Data The following page is displayed Line Operational Data Click on ADSL OP Data drop down list and select the item Line OP Then select the line port 1 48 Click on Query button ADSL Line Operational Data r ADSL OP Data Line OP y Port 1 y Query ADSL LIHE OP Data HE US FE DS Rel Capacity Occupation 109 100 Noise Margin 3 5 db 8 0 db Signal Attenuation 1 S dh 0 0 db Loop Attenuation 1 8 db 0 0 db ADSL LINE OP Data Wm mm Output Power 12 1 dbm 9 5 dbm Actual PSD 50 0 dbm Hz 38 0 dbm Hz ADSL LINE OP
93. 42 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us tss Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of far end tss upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all port gt adsl carrier fe us tss Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 43 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us snr Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of near end snr upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us snr Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 44 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us qin Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of near end qln upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us qlin Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 222 5 3 45 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlin Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of near end hlin upstream by Bridge port
94. 43 5 4 44 5 4 45 5 4 46 5 4 47 5 4 48 5 4 49 5 4 50 5 4 51 5 4 52 5 4 53 5 4 54 5 4 55 5 4 56 5 4 57 5 4 58 5 4 59 5 4 60 5 4 61 5 4 62 5 4 63 5 4 64 5 4 65 5 4 66 5 4 67 5 4 68 5 4 69 5 4 70 5 4 71 5 4 72 5 4 73 5 4 74 5 4 75 5 4 76 5 4 77 5 4 78 5 4 79 5 4 80 5 4 81 5 4 82 5 4 83 5 4 84 5 4 85 5 4 86 5 4 87 5 4 88 5 4 89 5 4 90 IGMP max Oroup Jmtt ENNEN 251 Leila Heite E 251 OMO SMO OP ING DE 251 igmp rtport gigabit E 252 igmp rtport gi GE 252 OMP Bil er EE 253 TAN VSESIOIN cies A A 253 intertace A O a 253 interface gigabit dead 253 mternaca KOSI aiae raae aaa AEA p EEan 254 WT ee le ee E EE 254 mac spoofing detect og 254 Management EE 254 management dhcp Hmeout ee 254 management dhcp leasetime AE 255 management de EEN 209 management gbe vlan nn ccnnnncnns 255 management gbe vlan priority ococcoonicnnccnccccnnncccnnnncnanacnnnnnnnns 256 management MOM EE 256 ue Re EE 256 port template Mask oooococnccccccccccncccconanananancncnonnncnnnnnnann no ccnnnnnnns 257 port template UNMASK uk 257 port template Template port 257 A ah Aa wt a oR aha ee tT ee ea aR 257 priority queue atm priority Abee 258 priority queue atm Oueuet weight 258 priority queue atm Oueuel weight 258 priority queue atm OuUeue weight 259 priority queue atm Oueue i weight 259 priority queue atm scheduling un 259 priority queue gigabit priority EE 259 prole Ma it asc 260 profile IMP 260 profile servic
95. 48 Interface Definition Interface Description POWER Power On Off switch 48V 48V DC Power plug in IDL 4802 48 FAN RJ 45 port for connection with the RJ 45 port on the front panel of fan card to provide power to the fan HK RJ 50 port for housekeeping inputs and one alarm contact output Console RS 232 port for system configuration and maintenance 9600 8 N 1 RST A hidden reset button for hardware resetting ACO Alarm Cut Off MGMT Ethernet Port connected to LAN for providing system out band Telnet control interface such as system monitor control or software upgrade Uplink 1 amp 2 Gigabit Ethernet electrical trunk ports SFP1 amp 2 Gigabit Ethernet SFP trunk ports PHONE 1 amp 2 RJ 21 connector for connecting POTS lines LINE 1 amp 2 RJ 21 connector for connecting DSL lines LED Definition LED Description Uplink Port connect with 100 1000Mbps Ethernet link Uplink Port connect with 10Mbps Ethernet link Uplink Active Inactive Uplink Port Transmit receive data Normal Operation SYS Self test fail ALM Normal Operation To indicate the system alarm status DSL status ADSL Port is activated and linked ADSL Port is Disabled ADSL Port is activated but not linked 1 4 2 Rear Panel IDL 4802 IDL 4802 48 Port Definition Description AC Power cord plug in 100 240VAC
96. 5 20 TCA Profile Mode Commande connmccoccccccccncnnnnnanannncnonononnnnnanancncnnrnnnnnnnnannnnnns 354 5 20 1 asada aaa 354 5 20 2 adsitica Geleet 354 5 20 3 adsl tca GNADIS ui 354 5 20 4 adsl tca EE A OA 354 Appendix A ADSL Operational Mask Table o oooonncccccononicccccnnnnnncnnnnnnancnnnnnnancn nano 355 Appendix B Alarm Table cocinar id 356 Appendix C Maintenance Requirement cccccceeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 357 Appendix D Introduction for Troubleshooting cccsseseenesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenseneeeeeenes 361 Introduction The PLANET IDL 4802 is a 48 Port ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 mini IP DSLAM which equips with combo electrical RJ 45 and fiber optical SFP uplink interfaces offering scalable and easy deployment for the network with small ADSL environment With the built in POTS splitter subscriber ports the IDL 4802 performs a cost effective solution for network service providers to offer multiple subscribers excellent services Moreover the IDL 4802 supports local and remote managed capabilities of CLI SNMP and Telnet via RS 232 console port and Web GUI management interface Via user friendly Web GUI the IDL 4802 can be managed by workstations running standard web browsers that provide the easy to use operation and convenient maintenance To enhance the network security the PLANET IDL 4802 also provides features such as QoS VLAN Multicast Bandwidth Management Traffic Prioritization and Access Cont
97. 769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 100 191 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 192 223 32769 32763 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 224 255 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32760 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 256 287 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 283 319 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 320 351 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 352 395 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763
98. 92 2 B Pots Overlapped 41 992 5 A Pots Overlapped 10 992 2 C_Temisdn_NonOverlapped 42 992 5 B_Isdn_NonOverlapped 11 992 2 C_Tecmlsdn_Overlapped 43 992 5 B Isdn_Overlapped 18 992 3 A Pots NonOverlapped 46 992 5 AllDigital NonOverlapped 19 992 3 A Pots Overlapped 47 992 5 AllDigital_Overlapped 20 992 3 B Isdn_NonOverlapped 48 ANSI_T1 424 21 992 3 B Isdn_ Overlapped 49 ETSI IG 101 270 24 992 4 A Pots NonOverlapped 50 993 1 25 992 4 A Pots Overlapped 51 IEEE 8023ah 28 992 3 AllDigital NonOverlapped 56 992 5 J AllDigital NonOverlapped 29 992 3 AllDigital_Overlapped 57 992 5 J AllDigital Overlapped 30 992 3 J AllDigital NonOverlapped 58 992 5 M Pots Extend US NonOverlapped 31 992 3 J AllDigital_Overlapped 59 992 5 M Pots Extend_US Overlapped 355 Appendix B Alarm Table Table B 1 Alarm Table Alarm ID Name Description 104 alm_fan_fail System Fan Fail 105 alm_self_test_fail System Self Test Fail 106 alm_above_temper System Above Temperature 107 alm_below_temper System Below Temperature 118 alm_dsl_dsp System DSP Fail 601 alm_adsl_los Near end Loss of Signal 602 alm_adsl_lof Near end Loss of Frame 603 alm_adsl_lom Near end Loss of Margin 610 alm_adsl_lcd Near end Loss Cell Delineation 612 alm_adsl_ncd Near end No Cell Delineation 613 alm_adsl_los fe Far end Loss of Signal 614 alm_adsl lof fe Far end Loss of Frame 615 alm_adsl om Te Far end Loss of Margin 616 alm_adsl_l
99. AN priority Level UnTagged Tagged Select to untag tag the frame no Stack Stack Disable Enable stacking Set Ingress ON check if the VID of the incoming frame is in the member set If not in the Ingress member set block the frame Set Ingress OFF Ingress filter disabled A Click on the drop down list and select to accept ALL Frame only VLAN tagged frame or ccFrm only Untagged frame ON OFF to enable disable isolation When port isolation is enabled packets received Isol from a trunk port when both the trunk interfaces are configured as up link cannot be forwarded to the other trunk port even for broadcasting Actor Priority Type in the System Priority of the Actor System Priority is a value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor s System ID Valid value 0 65535 Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to query current status la gt giga Click on this button to leave LACP and go to normal gigabit mode Aggregator Port Click on this button to enter the Aggregator Port setting page Aggregate Or Indicating whether the Aggregation Port is able to Aggregate or is only able to operate as an Individual Individual link Actor The local entity in a Link Aggregation Control Protocol exchange Partner The remote entity in a Link Aggregation Control Protocol exchange System ID A 6 octet MAC address which is a unique identifier for the
100. BPDU STP aware devices exchange Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs periodically When the bridged LAN topology changes a new spanning tree is constructed Root Bridge the base of the spanning tree It is the bridge with the lowest identifier value Bridge ID which is a field in the BPDU Path Cost the transmission cost sum of transmitting a frame to the Root Bridge through that path The transmission cost is assigned according to the speed of the link to which a port is attached The slower the media is the higher the cost become see the following table Transmission Cost Link Recommended Recommended Cost 4Mbps 250 100 to 1000 10Mbps 100 50 to 600 16Mbps_ 62 40 to 400 100Mbps 19 10 to 60 1Gbps 4 3 to 10 10Gbps 2 1to5 Root Port On a Non Root Bridge the port having the lowest path cost to the Root Bridge Designated Port Each LAN segment has a Designated Port If one port is determined to have the lowest path cost it becomes the Designated Port for that segment If there is more than one port having the same path cost in a segment the port having the lowest Bridge ID will be selected to be the Designated Port For a Root Bridge each port on itis a Designated Port for the connected segment After the STP determined the lowest cost spanning tree it enables all the root ports and designated ports and disables all other ports that participate in the spanning tree Network packets are therefore
101. Community Community4 Event Type NONE y NeW Joc y SNMPTRAP y LOGANDTRAP e Community 1 Community 2 Communitys RMON e ORMONI RMON RMON Event setup Label Description Description Type in comment describing the event Gammon If an SNMP trap is to be sent it will be sent to the SNMP community y specified in this column Owner Type in the RMON event owner Click on the drop down list and select event type Options are NONE Event Type LOG an entry is made in the log table for each event SNMPTRAP an yP SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations LOGANDTRAP log and send trap LastTimeSent We a of System Up Time at the time this event entry last generated 200 LOG This option allows you to query the RMON LOG Click on Query button to display the log Only the event indices with LOG or LOGANDTRAP event type are possible to appear in the log Remote Monitoring LOG 201 4 6 6 5 ADSL Day Interval This option allows you to query the ADSL PM 15 Min and Day Statistics The IDL 4802 provides Today and Previous 1 day for Day PM and also provides Current and Previous 1 96 interval for 15 Min PM From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then ADSL Day Interval The following page is displayed You can select to display one interval or all intervals data of a single port you can also select to display one interval data for twelve ports 1 12 13 2
102. Cs bridge ports you selected will be displayed Click on the radio button to select the PVC you want to create modify or delete ADSL PVC Setup Label Description VPI Type in the VPI value 0 255 Default value is 0 VCI Type in the VCI value 21 32 65535 Default value is 35 Click on the drop down list and select a traffic type for transmit and receive Traffic direction respectively Available options are created in the ATM Traffic Descriptor page Select AAL5 Encapsulation Type VCMUX LLC or AUTO for PVC 1 PVC 4 only Select in the drop down list to enable or disable protocol based VLAN Protocol Based VLAN function When protocol based VLAN is enabled the bridge port will work according to the protocol based VLAN table Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in current page Encap All 91 Click on the radio button to select a PVC bridge port that has not been Create created Set the parameter values and then click on Create to create a PVC Modif Click on the radio button to select the PVC bridge port you want to y modify Change the parameter values and then click on Modify Delete Click on the radio button to select the PVC bridge port you want to delete Then click on Delete to remove the PVC Query Click on this button to get the most recent data The IDL 4802 supports auto detection of the ATM AAL5 encapsulatio
103. Data HE FE Line Status Run Showtime LO N A Actual Op Mode 992 1_4_Pots_NonOverlapped N A C ANSI_T1413 992 1_4 Pots_NonOverlapped ETSI_DTS_TMO6006 992 2_4 Pots_NonOverlapped 992 1_4_Pots_NonOverlapped 992 1_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped 992 2_4_Pots_NonOverlapped 992 3_4_Pots_NonOverlapped 992 3_B_lsdn_NonOverlapped 992 3_L_Pots_NonOverlapped_Mode1 992 3_L_Pots_NonOverlapped_Mode2 992 3_M_Pots_Extend_US_NonOverlapped 992 5_4 Pots_NonOverlapped 992 5_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped 992 5_M_Pots_Extend_US_NonOverlapped ATUC Op Mode Capabilities Channel Operational Data Click on ADSL OP Data drop down list and select the item Channel OP Then select the port 1 48 Click on Query button The following page is displayed ADSL Channel Operational Data ADSL OP Deta Channel OP y Port 1 y Query ADSL LINE OP Data HE US FE DS Actual Bitrate kbps 1120 8128 Attainable Bitrate kbps 1024 8128 ADSL LINE OP Data HE DS FE US Actual Interleaving Delay ms 0 0 Actual Impulse Noise Protection Symbol 0 0 0 0 161 4 3 3 Line Config amp Info 4 3 3 1 Line Configuration This option allows you to setup the ADSL line configuration From the ADSL menu click on Line Config amp Info and then Line Configuration The following page is displayed ADSL Line Configuration ADSL Port from 1 TEH Modify OVANSI_T1413 Fe NETSI_DTS_TMO6006 Operational Mask Mode D 2 992 1_A4_Pots_No
104. Default value Type Optional 234 5 3 100 show profile tca adsl Description Display one specified threshold crossing alert profile or all profiles Syntax show profile tca adsl lt index gt all Parameter Name Description lt index gt Profile index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 101 show rmon alarm Description Display RMON alarm information Syntax show rmon alarm all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 102 show rmon ether_history Description Display RMON Ether history information Syntax show rmon ether_history lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 103 show rmon event Description Display RMON event information Syntax show rmon event all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON event entry index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 235 5 3 104 show rmon history Description Display RMON history control information Syntax show rmon history all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 105 show rmon log Description Display RMON log Synt
105. E 217 SHOW EE 217 show dsl line identify AEN 217 SHOW OD TON 217 show ele 218 SNOW len 218 show help EE 218 show Http EE 218 SNOW IOM DEE 218 AOLA ul OUI EEE E ene sane nee Cacciatee tenaeedanccineze 219 show igmp A 219 show igmp acl bind ooabt 219 show igmp acl bind gigabit Ia 220 show igmp acl bind del 220 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds snr 220 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds gln 220 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlin 221 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlog 221 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us load 221 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us gain 221 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us tss 222 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us snr 222 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us qln 222 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us bim 223 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlog 223 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds load 223 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds gain 223 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds tss 224 show interface xdsl all
106. E 319 5 12 14 Eeer IEN ese ree 319 5 12 15 muelen TE 320 5 12 16 Iesele ici Seeerei 320 5 12 17 Gel E 321 5 12 18 SSN NS EE 321 5 12 19 Ge Le 322 5 12 20 Sremac LIS EE 322 ATM Description Mode COMMANdS cccccccnnnnnnancconcnononennnananancncnnnenennnnnnnnnnnns 323 5 13 1 e EE 323 5 13 2 NO E due E 323 5 13 3 A ee A renee rae te ee en eee er eRe et ee ee eee ee 324 5 13 4 let 324 5 13 5 ISPs NN o a 325 5 13 6 A eh rete ete eee eh Sn api eke sia dee tetien 325 5 13 7 del 326 5 13 8 le EE 327 5 13 9 CIPS INS EE EE 328 5 13 10 Eeer 328 5 13 11 le le GE 329 5 13 12 VOU Ae i a tas si A ai ee ee ates oie 330 Priority List Mode COMMANGCG cccsseseeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesenneeeeenes 331 5 14 1 6 ee ee ona 331 5 14 2 OS ele A ee A 332 5 14 3 KEE 332 5 14 4 STO NST dices acteurs EAEAN EAE EEE EE 333 5 14 5 EISE tege ee 333 5 14 6 EE 334 5 14 7 ethertype el At deh iat idilio 334 5 14 8 ethertype Sanit 335 5 14 9 a A A A AAE EEE E 335 5 14 10 eelste e BI 336 5 14 11 Gel WEE 336 5 14 12 TO 337 5 14 13 STOMAC iia dl a dig 337 5 14 14 sremac liura 338 5 14 15 e 338 5 14 16 MS NST E 339 5 14 17 ADEM le ME 339 5 14 18 A Tele EE 339 Alarm Profile Mode Command cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenees 340 5 15 1 alarm mask ege eege deer 340 5 15 2 alarm UNMASK enini ieee a aaae aee EAE E A AAAA EEE AANRAAI 340 5 15 3 SEENEN 340 5 15 4 ala ire IEN 341 5 16 IGMP ACL Profile Mode Command cc
107. Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number No From To value 1 256 Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to Query f 8 display the filter rules Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to Delete A i delete the filter rules in the table 3 Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA aost 2 Port 1 a fevca zl bridge por Source MAC Type in the MAC Address of the source Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 109 IP Address Filtering Source IP Address Filtering Filtering Typel Source IP y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 3 source o P P P mip fo fo fo Create Source IP Address Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid Get number value 1 256 Quer Once you have specified the serial number click on this y button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table sl Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or aos y Port 1 fevc 1 GIGA bridge por
108. GMP group address Delete Click on this button to delete channel s IGMP group address Binding Profile page gt IGMP ACL Profile MP PR BINDING PROFILE ADSL y Port 01 12 y pvc 1 y Max Groups range form 1 to 128 Modity All select M Quickly Max Group Assign Quickly Profile ID Assign 01 lande Binding Assign off y Assign rm d Same PO crape SE PO croupe Ott VM a e x jot zs MV os jJmnslion x MV 118 02 Jon zs MV 8 com rf jor s MV 128 01 JJon s Mo sa jJmnsllon zs Bos Joel ziron Je Za zies fon E a Joel Zeg Je le Zeep fon x IGMP ACL Profile Binding Label Description ADSL y Port 01 12 y ass y Click on these drop down lists to select a line bridge port Click on this checkbox to select all ports in this page at one time This is convenient for quickly value assignment All select This field is for quick value assignment assign the same value to all the ports in current page at one time Type in the maximum IGMP groups can be joined simultaneously per line port and then click on Assign to put the value into the table Quickly Max Group Assign Click on this drop down list to select the profile ID you want to bind This is for quick value assignment Click on this drop down list to select the binding action This is for quick value assignment Options are off unbind the profile on bind the profile reset
109. I Owner RMON1 RMON2 Rx DropEvents 00000000 00000000 Rx Bytes 00000000 00000000 Rx Packets 00000000 00000000 Rx BroadcastPkts 00000000 00000000 Rx MulticastPkts 00000000 00000000 Rx CRC Align Errors 00000000 00000000 Rx Undersize Pkts 00000000 00000000 Rx Oversize Pkts 00000000 00000000 Rx Fragments 00000000 00000000 Rx Jabbers 00000000 00000000 Tx Collisions 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 64bytes 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 65 127bytes 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 128 255bytes 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 256 511bytes 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 512 1023bytes 00000000 00000000 Tx Rx Pkts 1024 1518bytes 00000000 00000000 Tx Bytes 00000000 00000000 Tx Packets 00000000 00000000 Tx Multicast Pkts 00000000 00000000 Tx Broadcast Pkts 00000000 00000000 To modify an entry in this table click on the index to select the entry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete 192 The following parameters are monitored in this table RMON ETH Statistics variables Variable Description Rx DropEvents Monitoring Rx dropped events Rx Bytes Monitoring Rx bytes packets Rx Packets Monitoring Rx packets Rx BroadcastPkts Rx MulticastPkts Monitoring Rx broadcast packets Monitoring Rx multicast packets Rx CRC Align Errors Monitoring Rx error alignment packets Rx Undersize Pkts Monitoring Rx undersize packets Rx
110. I ESL Cm o o 000000000000000000000000 dun 1000000000000000000000000s d d h d Sp KE The Console interface on the front panel is the main control interface of the IDL 4802 To connect the host PC to the console port a RJ45 male connector to RS232 DB9 female connector cable is required The RJ45 connector of the cable is connected to the COM port of the DSLAM the DB9 connector of the cable is connected to the PC COM port Console Port RJ 45 pin assignment 12345678 3 4 6 Other pins TX RX GND unused To connect the host PC to the console port a RJ45 male connector to RS232 DB9 female connector cable is required The RJ45 connector of the cable is connected to the COM port of the DSLAM the DB9 connector of the cable is connected to the PC COM port The pin assignment of the console cable is shown below DB 9F RJ 45M Pin 7 2 Pin 2 RD 3 Pin 3 TD 4 5 Pin 5 DGND 6 7 8 31 7 Housekeeping Connection 48 Port DSLAM Switch PLANET 101 4802 DSL Sutas 1175871141081010212117 2104078900454 in 000000000000000000000000 dun 000000000000000000000000s The IDL 4802 equips with a RJ 50 port HK on the front panel to provide four housekeeping inputs and one alarm contact output Generally housekeeping contacts can connect to environment sensor controlled switch to indicate the operation environment condi
111. IC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup Ether Type Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete orca y cicat y To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Incoming EtherType Type in the EtherType value hexadecimal Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 126 4 2 4 3 Rate Limit This option allows you to limit the rate of broadcast multicast packets that are received on a VLAN and configure the Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile From the Bridge menu click on Access Control and then Rate Limit The following page is displayed Click on the Rate Limit Type drop down list and select the item you want to setup Rate Limit Select Rate Limit Typel Select y lt gt Rate Limit Broadcast Rate Limit Broadcast Rate Limit Type Broadcast y Committed Information Rate 0000 1536 1000000000 Bits sec ucket2O 1 1024 Mill sec _Modity _Query
112. L BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup VLAN Priority Regeneration Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view No From To value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on Query this button to retrieve To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on Delete this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA GIGA clicar bridge pol i li he i ing VLAN Priori Priority In Fa on the drop down list and select the incoming riority 0 i li h ing VLAN priori Priority Out SC on the drop down list and select the outgoing priority 0 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 122 lt gt Differentiated Services orca y clicar y Next No 3 VLAN DSCP Priority Remark PRI Remark 8 DiffServe y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Incoming os 00 DEF AULT X Priority Out y Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup Differentiated Services Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 Query
113. M Traffic Descriptor page BRAS Click on the drop down list and select a BRAS MAC Available options are created in the PoA BRAS MAC page Uplink Click on the drop down list and select the uplink interface Encap Select AAL5 Encapsulation Type VCMUX LLC Status Enable Disable IPoA IWF Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to query most recent data 146 4 3 ADSL 4 3 1 Profile 4 3 1 1 Service Main Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL line service profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Service Profile main The following page is displayed ADSL Service Profile Select Index Joo 10 EN Moaity Delete _Query The First Index is default profile cant modify amp delete e S s 2 2 si S 2 Rate Mode Rate Mode DownStream UpStream 3 Dynamic y t3 Dymamic y ADSL Line Service Profile setup Label Description Select Index Click on the drop down list and select the range of profile index Options are 0 10 11 20 111 120 This field shows the profile index Click on the radio button beside the Index profile index to select the profile you want to modify or delete Note that profile 1 default cannot be modified or deleted Name Type in the name of the profile Rate Mode Downstream Click on the drop down list and select the Downstream Rate Adaptive Mode Valid options are Man
114. MAC Address of the destination lick h li h ing VLAN priori Priority Out K E SCH e drop down list and select the outgoing priority Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 120 lt gt VLAN ID eca y cicat D LAN ID 1 Priority Out O y Create VLAN ID Priority Remark YPRI Remark 6 LAN D y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup VLAN ID Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value No From To range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this Query button to retrieve To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this Delete button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA orca y clicar y bridge port VLAN ID Type in the VLAN ID 1 4094 Priority Out a on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 121 lt gt VLAN Priority Regeneration VLAN Priority Re Generation PRI Remark DYLAN Priority Regen D No From 1 To No range from 1 to 1024 Query Delete eca D clica y Priority Out _7 Create GIGA BRIDGE XDS
115. Mandatory 328 5 13 11 vbr shp Description Syntax Parameter VBR shaped traffic setting atmClpTransparentScr vbr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt SCI gt Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 329 5 13 12 vbrnrt Description Syntax Parameter VBR nrt shaped traffic setting atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt vbr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt SCI gt Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mand
116. N HLOG C The SHR formula snr 32 value 2 dB The Signal to Noise Ratio per carrier over the Upstream passband Near END carer 0 1 2 37 4 567 8 910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 15 19 20 21 22 24 25 2 27 2 29 3 3l 0 31 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 122 102 143 149 159 162 164 166 109 171 174 175 175 174 175 175 175 174 171 166 164 180 153 142 105 32 63 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 The SHR formula snr 32 value 2 dB The Signal to Noise Ratio per carrier over the Downstream passband Far END Carre ole st Sb oS OAS eeleren el ees a 26 et eons USCH 0 31 SA 6 amp 4 G4 G4 GA GA G4 G4 64 G4 SA A e GA a SA SA GA GA ei GA 32 63 SA 142 144 149 151 155 157 160 162 165 166 169 170 172 173 174 176 177 173 1 17 19 190 191 1M 191 12 1 10 10 10 190 G95 mz 1 194 194 194 1 10 194 194 10 12 1 1 10 10 193 10 193 10 10 19 163 175 12 12 13 12 12 12 10 12 eem ia 102 192 102 191 102 191 101 191 191 191 101 191 191 191 191 19 191 191 19 191 192 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 19 129 459 179 179 179 179 179 179 177 196 179 179 179 179 173 179 179 179 129 179 179 179 179 179 179 179 173 179 o aa 173 a 13 480 491 a 178 179 179 177 177 477 477 177 477 177 477 177 477 177 477 477 477 177 176 477 176 106 177 175 176 176 176 175 176 1 192225 175 176 176 176 175 176 175 175 175 175 175 475 174 173 174 175 174 174 174 174 174 174 174 174 174 175 174 174 174 174 173
117. N Disbale C 10 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale e 11 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale o 12 ADSL PVC CONFIGURATION STATIC VLAN You shall click on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC first Then the data of these PVCs bridge ports you selected will be displayed Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify ADSL Bridge Setup Label Description VID Type in the default port VLAN ID Valid value is 1 4094 VLAN setting for the egress traffic Includes three drop down lists UnTagged Tagged select untagging tagging the outgoing frames downstream direction for line bridge port If UnTagged is selected a double tagged packet will leave single tagged the outer most VLAN tag is removed and a single tagged packet will leave untagged VLAN Pri 0 7 set the default VLAN priority level no Stack Stack TLS disable N 1 VLAN stacking enable N 1 VLAN stacking our system adds the default VLAN tag to all the incoming frames through this port enable TLS transparent LAN service so that this bridge port becomes VLAN transparent refer to DSL Forum TR 101 A pre configured S Tag is used to encapsulate TLS traffic going through this port That is an S Tag 93 PVID here will be added to all the upstream frames received on this port and the C Tags will be the original tags of these frames no C Tag for untagged incoming frames On the ot
118. N OFF to enable disable isolation When port isolation is enabled packets received from a Isol trunk port when both the trunk interfaces are configured as up link cannot be forwarded to the other trunk port even for broadcasting To modify the configuration of a giga port Modify 1 Click on the radio button to select trunk port 1 or port 2 2 Change the parameter values 3 Click on Modify button to apply new values Query Click on this button to query current status Click on this button to enable LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol function The LACP is giga gt la part of IEEE 802 3ad that allows bundling trunk ports together to form a single logical channel This feature can provide load sharing and failover when link status fails on a port When LACP mode is enabled the following page is displayed 87 GIGA Bridge Mode Upink Zap 1 mamac 1024 yranfer 0 Untagged ls Stack ingress ON y Jace Frm 2 4LL Frame y isolation ON y Actor Priority 21845 Modify Query la giga Aggregator Port ADSL PVC CONFIGURATION STATIC VLAN GIGA Bridge LACP Setup Label Description Mode Click on this drop down list and specify the trunk port to be an Uplink or User VID Type in the VLAN ID 1 4094 Max MAC Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the bridge port VLAN setting for the egress traffic Includes three drop down lists VLAN Pri 0 7 Set the VL
119. NET 48 Port ADSL 2 2 IP DSLAM Model IDL 4802 IDL 4802 48 Rev 1 0 Mar 2009 Part No EM IDL4802_v1 Table of Contents IMTOdUC HON EE 15 Ted Product TE 15 1 2 Package Comments iia ss 16 1 3 Application ninio 17 O A se eaaa ae eE e aaea eaea aa aeaa aaae eaa eLA eaae e eaea al 18 TARA Front Plis 18 Tete el E 19 1 5 Technical SpecificatlONn ici en 20 OCU ee ee Ere 22 2 1 Safety INStrU CMON D 22 2 2 Hardware IstallatoO sucia tati 23 2 2 1 System Requirements econo none anne 23 2 2 2 Installation FROU egeeieedetee e eeeegei re ES ebe eege er 24 2 3 WEB CONTIgUratiON coxis 34 2 3 1 System A dine ted etenn sed anc dedetene catteesateaddens 34 2 3 2 WEB Configuration Procedure un 35 2 3 3 How to backup Restore the Configuration sssesssssssenenneeeseerrrrrenn 40 20d Fimware Updates E 50 Software IntroduUcCtiON cxoiiimrarsiar aanaeio amia aeaaea iaiia ii ankaa 53 3 1 General e EE 53 3 1 1 Features of Management ntertace ENEE 54 3 2 Configuration Management ccccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 55 3 2 1 Bridge CONO srta catala 55 3 2 2 ADSL EES 56 3 3 Performance MaNnaGeMe nl cccccccsesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeennees 57 EE 59 3 4 Fault Management nuit ie e 60 3 5 Loopback Testi ini 62 3 6 Cl ster TE 63 WEB Manageme sniiisinn tn dd 64 AASYS EE E 70 BE En ed ren EE 70 4 1 2 Board IP SOU tod led kon dda idee did 71 4 1 3 Ethernet P
120. P address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File button Database Configuration Ajimport File write Download Config To FLASH Sg 1721610241 Fie Name config Write downloaded Config to Flash in progress Database Configuration EI rene nl Ajlmport File Arite Download Config To FLASH Write to memory successfully Database Configuration Ajimport File Write Download Config To FLASH Fail to Get File Adlmport File Write Download Config To FLASH Partition2 mE oare 171 B Import File Load Remote Config to Running Config Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File button Database Configuration DB Contig Select B import File Load Remote Config to Running Config y TFTP Server p 172 16 10 241 File Name foonfigl Get File Load to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select B import File Load Remote Contig to Running Config y TFTP Server ip 72 16 10 241 File Name Configl Get File Fail to Get File Database Configuration DB Config Select B lmport File Load Remote Config to Running Config D TP Server p 172 16 10 28 File Neme oonfig Get File 172 C Export File Put Running Config to Remote TFTP Server Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to ex
121. PLINK VID Priority MODE Create gt fi y 61 wt y Select sit 5 Jj 7 y Reserved y crac y oa BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE statie VLAN 100 N 1 VLAN N 1 User Mode N 1 can also be called shared VLAN so in this mode MAC learning function of the bridge ports must not be disabled 1 Replaced N 1 In this mode the system will change the user port s C Tag to the Uplink port s S Tag And the mapping is N to 1 so a user port s C Tag can t be used for another VLAN translation rule But an uplink port s S Tag can be used for another N 1 VLAN translation rule So in this mode several bridge ports can have the same VLAN cross connect rule Translation VLAN 4 1 User Mode H 1 User Mode C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode sTag ether type Dx 8100 Set eos mi feo Go ke Port Default VID VLAH ID List ADSL Port1 P C1 1 11558 Dette UPLINK Priority ADSL VID UPLIHK Port UPLINK VID VLAN MODE Create gt fi y Select y Select y Select y REPLACED Hi y GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN 101 4 2 2 4 Static Allowed IP This option allows you to configure the Static Allowed IP table From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then Static Allowed IP The following page is displayed To make bridge port work according to this Static Allowed IP table the IP allowed function must be enabled Static Allowed IP CONFIG ALLOWED IP
122. Priority Queue 1 Syntax priority queue atm queue weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 1 Valid values 1 255 Default value 20 Type Mandatory 258 5 4 66 priority queue atm queue2 weight Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 2 Syntax priority queue atm queue2 weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 2 Valid values 1 255 Default value 30 Type Mandatory 5 4 67 priority queue atm queue3 weight Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 3 Syntax priority queue atm queue3 weight lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 3 Valid values 1 255 Default value 40 Type Mandatory 5 4 68 priority queue atm scheduling Description Set priority queue scheduling only support SPQ mode or support SQP and WFQ modes Syntax priority queue atm scheduling sqp spq wfq Parameter None 5 4 69 priority queue gigabit priority Description Set gigabit interface priority queue mapping Syntax priority queue atm priority lt prio ID gt queue lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt number gt Priority queue value Valid values 0 3 Default value Type Mandatory
123. SH Load configuration from Flash to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select E Reload FLASH System Config to Running Contig y Load flash at Partition DI LOAD_FLASH 175 F Restore Factory Default Except out band IP address and user account all other configuration will be restored to factory default Click on Factory_Default button to restore factory default configuration Database Configuration DB Contig Select F Restore Factory Default DI Factory Default After loading default configuration to Flash successfully you must click on RESTART button to restart the system so that the configuration can take effect Database Configuration DB Config Select F Restore Factory Default y Factory Default 176 G Flash Boot Point Configuration Select Click on the Boot Config drop down list and select the partition Partition or Partition2 as the boot point Click on Apply button and then restart the system The system will restart and load the configuration in the partition you select into the running configuration Database Configuration DB Config Select G Flash Boot Point Configuration Select y Current DB Boot Point Partition2 Boot Config Partition Y Active DB zeen FLASH DEVICE O IMAGE FILE 1 EH Partition Boot Point Selector pe D E System Configuration O IMAGE FILE 2 System Configuration 177 4 6 3 Firmware
124. Show operational status of the trunk ports ON OFF Current Speed Show current speed mode of the trunk ports Current Media Show current uplink transmission medium via copper or SFP This field will show N A when Oper Status is OFF Modify Click on this button to submit the modification 72 4 1 4 ADSL Port Service This option allows you to setup the service status of the line ports and to bind the selected service profiles and spectrum profiles Also you can query current setting and the operational status of the line ports From the System menu click on ADSL Port Service The following page is displayed First click on the drop down list to select the port range to be displayed Remember to click on the radio button to select a port to be modified or select the All checkbox to modify all ports of the page ata time ADSL Circuit Service AdminJON y Service Profile l Spectrum Profile l tea Profile 1 a Modify The Service Profile range from 1 to 120 The Spectrum Profile range from 1 to 120 The TCA Profile range from 1 to 64 Port 01 12 D Query CR WE WK WO WK WE We SERVICE PROFILE SPECTRUM PROFILE TCA PROFILE ADSL Circuit Setup 73 Label Admin Description Click on the drop down list and select the Administrative status ON OFF or RESET Service Profile Type in the index of the Service Profile 1 120 Spectrum Profile Type in the ind
125. Shows current speed mode of the MGMT port Remote IP Shows the IP address of the management PC currently connected to this DLSAM System Name You can modify the name of the system here Modify Click on this button to submit the modification RESTART Click on this button to restart the system Fie 4 1 3 Ethernet Port Service This option allows you to set the administration state select the speed mode and select the transmission medium for the Gigabit Ethernet ports From the System menu click on Ethernet Port Service The following page is displayed Sa Ethernet Port Setup Admin ON AutoNegotiate SFP First bd System Inventory Ethernet Port Service Setup Label Description Port This field shows port number of the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces Admin Statue Click on the drop down list and select the administrative state ON OFF to enable disable GBE ports Selected Speed Selected Media Click on the drop down list and select the speed mode for trunk GBE port Supported options are AutoNegotiate 100Mbps Half duplex 100Mbps Full duplex Click on the drop down list and select the cable mode for trunk GBE port Options are SFP First when both optical and electrical uplinks are connected optical interface is chosen to transport data Copper First when both optical and electrical uplinks are connected electrical interface is chosen to transport data Link Status
126. System Config te flash al Partition y wrte_Running 46 E Reload Flash to Running Config Click on the drop down list and select partition and then click on LOAD_FLASH button to load configuration from Flash to Running Config Database Configuration DB Contig Select E Reload FLASH System Config to Running Contig y Load flash at Partition2 y LOAD_FLASH Load configuration from Flash to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select EJReload FLASH System Config to Running Config Se Load flash at Partiion2 y LOAD_FLASH 47 F Restore Factory Default Click on Factory_Default button to restore factory default configuration Database Configuration DB Contig Select F Restore Factory Default y Factory Default After loading default configuration to Flash successfully you must click on RESTART button to restart the system so that the configuration can take effect Database Configuration DB Config Select F Restore Factory Default D Factory Default 48 G Flash Boot Point Configuration Select Click on the Boot Config drop down list and select the partition Partition1 or Partition2 as the boot point Click on Apply button and then restart the system The system will restart and load the configuration in the partition you select into the running configuration Database Configuration DB Contig Select G Flash Boot Poin
127. System that contains this Aggregator ae System Priority is a value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor s Partner s System Priority System ID The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregator The administrative Key value Admin Key may differ from the operational Key value The meaning of particular Key values is of local significance The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator The administrative Key value may Oper Key differ from the operational Key value The meaning of particular Key values is of local significance 88 Click on Aggregator Port in the previous figure the following page is displayed GIGA Bridge Back Query Apply Aggregate ports support without setting M Ej E 9 y Y GIGA Bridge Aggregator Port Setup The following labels may appear in the Actor s or Partner s Administrative Operational state Label Description If the operational state shows LA_ACT ON this indicates the Activity control ek is Active LACP otherwise the Activity control is Passive LACH LA_Timeout means the Timeout control value with regard to this link If the LA_Timeout operational state shows LA_Timeout ON this indicates Short Timeout otherwise Long Timeout If the operational state shows Aggr ON this indicates that the System considers this link to be Aggregatable i e a potential candidate for aggregation If not the link is conside
128. Tar Max L2 Time L2 ATPRT us min e EN E ees Power Index Hame Mode Disable L2 L2L3 Oo o ENEE 511 default Suss EEEE ADSL Spectrum Profile setup Label Description Click on the drop down list and select the range of profile index Select Index i Options are 1 4 5 8 117 120 This field shows the profile index Click on the radio button beside the profile Index index to select the profile you want to modify or delete Note that profile 1 default cannot be modified or deleted Name Type in the name of the profile Click on the radio button to select allowed power management mode Power Mode Options are Disable only LO state allowed L2 LO and L2 states allowed L2L3 LO L2 and L3 states allowed Type in the minimum time in seconds between Exit from L2 low power state and the next Entry into the L2 low power state Value range is 0 255 Type in the minimum time in seconds between an Entry into L2 low power L2 Time state and the first L2 low power trim request and between two consecutive L2 power trim requests Value range is 0 255 LO Time Type in the maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is L2 ATPR allowed at transition of LO to L2 state or an L2 low power trim request Value range is O the value of L2 ATPRT dB Type in the total maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is allowed in the L
129. Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 336 5 14 12 srcip list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 13 srcmac Description Syntax Parameter Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional Show source IP address priority list srcip list None Specify source MAC of packets to remark vlan priority srcmac lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la mac lt mac address gt scrmac lt number gt list scrmac lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Source mac priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx xx XXx Xx xx xx xx 0 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory
130. Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory value Set start stop frequency KHz Valid values 0 12000 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 3 bands lt index gt mask Description Set bands mask Syntax bands lt index gt mask lt value gt Parameter Name Description index Bands array index Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory value Valid values see the following egress_no_control egress no control egress_notched egress notched ingress_low ingress low 348 ingress_weak ingress weak ingress_strong ingress strong rf_signal_am RF Signal AM Type rf_signal_hamband RF Signal HAMBAND Type Default value egress_no_control Type Mandatory 5 19 4 carriermask Description Set carrier mask Syntax carriermask ds us lt index gt lt value gt Parameter Name Description index Carrier mask array index Valid values 0 63 Default value Type Mandatory lt value gt Carrier mask array value Valid values 0x00 Oxff Hex Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 5 message based Description Set minimum DS US message based data rate that is needed by ATU Syntax message based ds us min lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Min downstream upstream message based data rate Valid values 4 28 kbps Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 6 modem features De
131. Valid values 00 99 Type Mandatory 280 5 4 134 time set time Description Syntax Parameter Set time of the system default is current system time time set time hh mm hh mm ss Name Description hh Hour in 24 hour format Valid values 00 23 Type Mandatory mm Minute Valid values 00 59 Type Mandatory ss Second Valid values 00 59 Type Optional 5 4 135 time set timezone Description Syntax Parameter Set timezone time set timezone lt timezone gt Name Description timezone Timezone Type Mandatory Valid values Given below idl idlw West nt ahst Standard Time hst bdt cat yst hat pst ydt mst pdt cst mdt est GMT 12 00 International Date Line GMT 12 00 International Date Line GMT 11 00 Nome Time GMT 10 00 Alaska GMT Hawaii Hawaiian Standard Time BDT Central Alaska Time Yukon Standard Time GMT 10 00 GMT 10 00 GMT 10 00 GMT 09 00 GMT 09 00 HDT GMT 08 00 Pacific Standard Time GMT 08 00 YDT GMT 07 00 Mountain Standard Time GMT 07 00 Pacific Daylight Time GMT 06 00 Central Standard Time GMT 06 00 Mountain Daylight Time GMT 05 00 Eastan Standard Time gt a 281 cat ast edt nst Time adt bst gst at wat gmt wet ut utc cet met mewt Time swt fut eet mest Summer Time fst es ed bt it zp4 zp5 ist zp6 sst wast Sta
132. Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt Cir gt Committed Information Rate bps Valid values 1536 1000000000 Default value 80000 Type Mandatory lt lbs gt Leakage Bucket Size millisecond Valid values 1 1024 Default value 80 Type Mandatory 320 5 12 17 srcip Description Specify source IP address of packets to filter Show specify source IP deny access list entry Delete specify source IP deny access list entry Syntax srcip lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la ip lt ipv4 address gt lt net mask gt srcip lt number gt list srcip lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Source IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional 5 12 18 srcip list Description Display source IP deny access list Syntax srcip list Parameter None 321 5 12 19 srcmac Description Specify source MAC of packets to rej
133. X T RX SFP Mini GBIC Prepare a proper SFP module and install it into the optical trunk port Then you can connect fiber optics cabling that uses LC connectors or SC connectors with the use of an optional SC to LC adapter to the fiber optics connector on the trunk port 29 5 Management Port Connection 48 Port DSLAM Switch PLANET ETH TETEE ot 600000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000 The IDL 4802 provides one RJ45 MGMT on the front panel for Ethernet interface connection To connect the Ethernet interface to PC directly an Ethernet crossover cable is required Ethernet Port RJ 45 pin assignment 1 2 3 6 Other pins Me Te Ae Re eee Termination To connect the Ethernet interface to PC the Ethernet crossover cable is required The detailed pin assignment is shown below Green White 8 Orange Green 7 2 Orange White Orange White 6 3 Brown Blue 5 4 Blue White Blue White 4 5 Blue Orange 3 6 Brown White Brown White 2 ri Green Brown 1 8 Green White Name Pin Pin Name Tx 1 q RX Tx 2 gt 6 Rx Rx 3 gt 1 TX Rx 6 Mech 2 Tx 30 6 Console Port Connection j IE CL 48 Port DSLAM Switch PLANET 1157010117922 527 M
134. a Eaa 305 5 9 9 KT 305 5 9 10 EE Ee 306 5 9 11 Eenheete 306 5 9 12 ECH see 306 5 9 13 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable oocoocincccoccccconcccccnnncnononcnnncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos 306 5 9 14 vlan lt VLAN ID gt A A A Ae ata a ioe 307 5 9 15 Nr ENEE o 307 5 9 16 ET BI EE 307 ADSL Configure Mode Commands ccccccccnnnnncncnoncnincnonennnnananancnnnnenennnnananannns 308 5 10 1 line mode Caos a A Ati et cekads 308 5 10 2 line mode diagnostic ENEE 308 5 10 3 line MOOG Torcuato 308 5 10 4 line Mode Mask croata oa 308 5 10 5 IMPONE iio deidad 309 5 10 6 line re OT 309 5 10 7 line STEE geed EECH 309 IPoA Configure Mode COMMANGG cccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 310 5 11 1 EN e 310 5 11 2 DIASIMAC E 310 5 11 3 O a ra 310 5 11 4 ET DEE 310 5 11 5 leie EE 311 5 11 6 MS 311 5 11 7 PE a 311 5 11 8 UE 311 5 11 9 pvc atmdesc plc sachin dicnd cet diia 312 5 11 10 pvc EE 312 5 11 11 pre leie UE 312 5 11 12 plink ee 312 Access List Mode COMMA cccccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneees 313 5 12 1 DOPAC latido 313 5 12 2 porate GS niio a ed cei deg 313 5 12 3 SUNG ia E Cae Snse ase es es E reg aed snes eens ac caed anatase 314 5 12 4 ee Le EE 314 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 12 5 COU EE 315 5 12 6 CISTI MIST EE 315 5 12 7 CINCO fi ee cat cet vets rues eege Eege deeg 316 5 12 8 SMED a A a Ea aa 316 5 12 9 ip allowed EE 317 5 12 10 IDPANOWEO Sl EE 317 5 12 11 o EE 318 5 12 12 eil ege e BI 319 5 12 13 E
135. aaa 212 5 2 3 O 212 5 2 4 SHOWS asadas 212 5 2 5 OOO VERSION Ma cok sede Seen coset Sen ee ones 212 5 3 Enable Mode Commands cccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeeees 213 5 3 1 CORPGUN E 213 5 3 2 A 213 5 3 3 show access list berate EE 213 5 3 4 show access list dStip EEN 213 5 3 5 show access list dStmac EEN 214 5 3 6 show access list ethertype AEN 214 5 3 7 show access list p allowed 214 5 3 8 show access list ipprotocol EEN 214 5 3 9 show access list l4dstport cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 215 5 3 10 show access list mcfldrate AEN 215 5 3 11 show access list SICID svc a eas a eee ae 215 5 3 12 Ge 215 5 5 3 13 5 3 14 5 3 15 5 3 16 5 3 17 5 3 18 5 3 19 5 3 20 5 3 21 5 3 22 5 3 23 5 3 24 5 3 25 5 3 26 5 3 27 5 3 28 5 3 29 5 3 30 5 3 31 5 3 32 5 3 33 5 3 34 5 3 35 5 3 36 5 3 37 5 3 38 5 3 39 5 3 40 5 3 41 5 3 42 5 3 43 5 3 44 5 3 45 5 3 46 5 3 47 5 3 48 5 3 49 5 3 50 5 3 51 5 3 52 5 3 53 5 3 54 5 3 55 5 3 56 5 3 57 5 3 58 5 3 59 5 3 60 5 3 61 5 3 62 5 3 63 5 3 64 SNOW account 216 A EEE AEA E ET 216 show GEHEIERT ege 216 show alarm EE 216 show alarm history 0 cece eee eeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 216 show alarm aco netsh ciccnh tie tal sacs iadihalatenea habe heaacencaeateniey 216 SIMO WCAG SG sic cant idan cette cee ani cee i 216 show atm loopback Cavas 217 gen e e oyo A A A 217 SOW A AP AP P A E
136. ackets that contain these source IP addresses can pass through this bridge port otherwise the packets will be blocked All Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in current page Modif Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify Change the y parameter values and then click on Modify Query Click on this button to get the most recent data 95 4 2 2 VLAN Configuration 4 2 2 1 Static VLAN This option allows you to configure the static VLAN table From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then Static VLAN The following page is displayed Click on the radio button to select CONFIG VLAN to configure static VLAN for the bridge ports or SHOW VLAN to display the VLAN table CONFIG VLAN Click on the drop down list to select ADSL or GIGA port and then select a port and PVC if ADSL is selected Once you have selected the bridge interface its current static VLAN setting is displayed To add a new VLAN member type in VID for the New VID field and then select Tagged UnTagged for VLAN Tag ON OFF for Isolation and VLAN priority level Specify a number or reserve the original value for Priority At last click on Create gt button To delete a VLAN select the checkboxes of the entries you want to delete and then click on Delete button Static VLAN CONFIG VLAN SHOW VLAN Port Default VID VLAN ID List ADSL Port1 PVC1 1 5 8 Delete A
137. alues 1 500 second Default value BC 400 LMQT 1 MRT 10 Query 125 URI 1 Type Mandatory 5 4 45 igmp version Description Set IGMP protocol version Syntax igmp version v1 v2 v3 Parameter None 5 4 46 interface gigabit Description Go to Gigabit Ethernet Interface execution mode from Configure mode Syntax interface gigabit lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 47 interface gigabit la Description Syntax interface gigabit la Parameter None Go to Gigabit Ethernet link aggregation Interface execution mode from Configure mode 253 5 4 48 interface xdsl Description Go to xDSL Interface execution mode from Configure mode Syntax interface xdsl lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 49 mac spoofing detect Description Enable Disable MAC spoofing detection Syntax mac spoofing detect enable disable Parameter None 5 4 50 mac spoofing detect log Description Enable Disable MAC spoofing detection log Syntax mac spoofing detect log enable disable Parameter None 5 4 51 management dhcp Description Enable DHCP client Disable DHCP client Use DHCP to request and obtain IP address again Syntax management dhcp enable disable renew Pa
138. am Minimum Maximum Planned L2 minimum bit rate Syntax bitrate ds us min max planned 12 lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Bit rate kb s Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 5 18 2 delay Description Set downstream upstream delay introduced by the interleaving Syntax delay ds us lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Delay time ms Valid values 1 63 Default value Type Mandatory 5 18 3 12 packet Description Set L2 Packet cell Syntax 2 packet lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Set L2 Packet cell Valid values 0 28 Default value Type Mandatory 5 18 4 mode Description Set downstream upstream rate adaptive mode to init rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change after that dynamic rate automatically selected at initialization and is continuously adapted during show time or manual rate changed manually Syntax mode ds us init dynamic manual Parameter None 346 5 18 5 noise Description Set downstream upstream minimum impulse noise protection Syntax noise ds us lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Noise tenth symbols Valid values 0 8 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 18 6 noisemargin Description Set Downshift Upshift Noise Margin in downstream ups
139. ame system contact and system location From the System menu click on System Contact Info The following page is displayed System Contact Information amy sel IDL 4802 i Type in the value you desire and then click on Modify to apply the setting Click on Query to verify if the value is changed System Contact Info Setup Label Description Name Type in the system name 1 32 characters in length Contact Type in the system contact 0 63 characters in length Location Type in the system location 0 63 characters in length Description Description of the system Read only 81 4 1 9 SNTP This option allows you to setup the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP From the System menu click on SNTP The following page is displayed Simple Network Time Protocol 25 0 0 GMT Greenwich Mean Time v 2007 f 7 f 12 05 46 36 65535 e 206 15 3 SNTP Setup Label Description Sets the local time zone by selecting in the Time Zone drop down Time Zone list Sixty five of the world s time zones are presented including those using standard time and summer daylight savings time System Date Sets system date yyyy mm dd System Time Sets system time hh mm ss Polling Interval Sets the polling interval in seconds that SNTP client will sync with a designated SNTP server SNTP Server address Sets the dedicated unicast server IP add
140. andatory 5 7 27 vlan list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan list Parameter None 298 5 8 GBE Bridge Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the GBE Bridge execution mode 5 8 1 accfrm Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 2 default vlan Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 3 default prio Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 4 egress Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 5 ingress Description Syntax Parameter Set acceptable frame type untagged only tagged only or all accfrm all tag untag None Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port default vian lt VLAN ID gt Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value 1 Type Mandatory Set default priority value for a bridge port default prio lt prio ID gt Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory Default PVID egress taged untagged setting egress tag untag None Enable disable ingress filter mode ingress enable disable None 299 5 8 6 isolation Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 7 link mode Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 8 max mac Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 9 priority regen Description Syntax Parameter 5 8 10 stack Description Syntax Parameter Enable Disable default PVID isolation setting isolation disabl
141. arm This option allows you to configure the RMON alarm setting This table controls the conditions on which alarms occur Click on New to create an entry To modify an entry click on the index to select the entry type in new value and then click on Modify To delete an entry click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete Remote Monitoring Alarm Select Typel Alarm y 3 Interval 1800 Owner RMONS ol DropEvents y 1 7 sampierype ABSOLUTE zl startupalarm RISNG y Rise Threshold Index 0 Rise Event Index D Fall Threshold 0 Fall Event new Modify Delete Query 1800 RMON2 DropEvents DropEvents Sampling ABSOLUTE Sampling ABSOLUTE Startup By RISING Startup By RISING RMON Alarm setup Label Description Interval The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds Value range 0 2147483647 0 disable Owner RMON alarm owner max 31 characters OID Variable Click on the drop down list to select ETH statistics variable and index of ETH Statistics table entries SampleType RMON alarm sample type includes ABSOLUTE the value of the selected variable will be compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval DELTA the value of the selected variable at the last sample will be subtracted from the current value and the difference compared with the thresholds
142. atic MAC forwarding entry Syntax fdbstatic lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Mandatory 248 5 4 29 fdbstatic list Description Show static MAC forwarding table or specified static MAC forwarding entry Syntax fdbstatic lt number gt list Parameter Name Description lt number gt Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Optional 5 4 30 firmware bootcode upgrade Description Get bootcode from FTP server and write to Flash ROM Syntax firmware bootcode upgrade lt filename gt Parameter Name Description lt filename gt Boot code path and file name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 31 firmware login Description Login FTP server that firmware image belongs to Syntax firmware login lt ipv4 address gt username lt name gt password lt password gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IPV4 address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx XXxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory lt name gt User name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt password gt Input password max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 249 5 4 32 firmware partition Description Syntax Parameter Set booting partition firmware partition
143. ation by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line config Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 54 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line delt test Description Display xDSL line DELT test information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line delt test Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 55 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line information Description Display xDSL line information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl line information Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 56 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl inventory Description Display xDSL inventory by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl inventory Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 225 5 3 57 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl operational Description Syntax Parameter Display xDSL far end near end operational information by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl operational fe ne Name Descript
144. ation of DSL line identify table Bridge port index Select the checkbox s corresponding to the circuit s Select Port i of which you want to modify the setting Circuit ID Type in the Circuit ID when CUSTOMER is selected for the CKT Type Remote ID Type in the Remote ID when CUSTOMER is selected for the Remote Type Click on this drop down list and specify the circuit to be trusted TRUE or Trusted untrusted FALSE the relay agent will discard the DHCP packets from an unstrusted circuit 137 4 2 7 IGMP 4 2 7 1 Protocol amp Router Port This option allows you to setup the IGMP protocol and router port From the Bridge menu click on IGMP and then Protocol amp Router Port The following page is displayed IGMP Protocol amp Router Port IGMP Protocol Settings Modify All of the interval from 1 to 500 Query Query Interval URI Unsolicited Report Interval BC Older host present interval MRT Max Response Time LMOT Last Member Query Time SMT Group Membership Time readonly IGMP Y2 e Snooping Disabled Disabled Disabled Mme Ee Ee e Router Port Settings GIGA GIGA2 Router Port VID 1 Router eo fp fp f The IGMP Router s IP is available while IGMP in Proxy mode 0 0 0 0 means an operator is needless IGMP Router s IP Create Daite IGMP Router Port Setup Label Description Modif Click on this button to modify the IGMP configuratio
145. atmdesc pol 296 5 7 19 pvc atmdesc EA eeEeedeEEeEeeeEeee 296 5 7 20 pvc EES DEST a gd dddene Ee dddeece Ee Eege 296 5 7 21 SLACK Eege EE EE 297 5 7 22 stack tls EE 297 5 7 23 CAPO acatar eebe 297 5 7 24 vMan lt YLAN DS CiSable ci ii 297 5 7 25 vlan lt VLAN ID gt EE 297 5 7 26 vlan lt VLAN DOS PO EE 298 5 7 27 EE 298 GBE Bridge Mode Command ccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeneees 299 5 8 1 ACCUM ee 299 5 8 2 DOUE o eecht 299 5 8 3 A nah plans nt salar an he Rta EA 299 5 8 4 GE 299 5 8 5 N ESS ioei inrer a e irae a asara eaaa aae ar rosaa 299 5 8 6 O A 300 5 8 7 EMOL ii 300 5 8 8 MAMAS sana a uci ae a Sa nda ai oral 300 5 8 9 priority rege Nos cats ace cps va is ag EE 300 5 8 10 Le 300 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 8 11 a taht let tel et eit at steht ba ces sieht tt 301 5 8 12 stpport enable disable AEN 301 5 8 13 Sipport PACO Einicio 301 5 8 14 EISE 301 5 8 15 16M gell 301 5 8 16 vlan lt VLAN D gt TE EE 302 5 8 17 vlan lt VLAN ID gt TEE 302 5 8 18 vlan lt VLAN ID gt DO Vitis iio de 302 5 8 19 A O IO 303 GBE LA Bridge Mode Command sssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 304 5 9 1 A te hee St isan schon Shoei teat ce a Sah teh a eh kee 304 5 9 2 default vlam ai lee leh hues tee dE 304 5 9 3 default prio DEE 304 5 9 4 GE 304 5 9 5 NOS cialis 304 5 9 6 E A 305 5 9 7 lacp actor priority system ooooocccccccccccccconcaocncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnns 305 5 9 8 A A i
146. atory 330 5 14 Priority List Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Priority List execution mode 5 14 1 ds Description Set Differentiated Service of packets to remark VLAN priority Show Differentiated Service priority list entry Disable Differentiated Service priority list entry Syntax ds lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la dscp lt dscp gt ds lt number gt list ds lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Differentiated Service priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt dscp gt Diffserv Code Points which is a 6 bit number The standardized combinations are listed below default Default value bits 000000 af11 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Low Drop bits 001 010 af12 Assured Forwarding Class 1 Medium Drop bits 001100 af13 Assured Forwarding Class 1 High Drop bits 001110 af21 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Low Drop bits 010010 af22 Assured Forwarding Class 2 Medium Drop bits 010100 331 5 14 2 ds list Description Syntax Paramete
147. ault PVID isolation setting isolation disable None Enable disable MAC learning ability of a bridge port mac learning enable disable None Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis max mac lt number gt Description Maximum number of the MAC addresses Valid values 1 128 Default value 0 Type Mandatory Name lt number gt 294 5 7 14 priority regen Description VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter Syntax priority regen incoming lt incoming prio gt outgoing lt outgoing prio gt disable Parameter Name Description lt incoming prio gt Incoming VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt outgoing prio gt Outgoing VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 15 protocol base Description Enable disable protocol based VLAN Syntax protocol base enable disable Parameter None 5 7 16 pvc Description Set VPI and VCI Syntax pvc lt VPI gt lt VCl gt Parameter Name Description lt VPI gt Virtual Path Identifier Valid values 0 255 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt VCl gt Virtual Channel Identifier Valid values 21 32 65535 Default value 35 Type Mandatory 5 7 17 pvc atmdesc Description List ATM traffic descriptor Syntax pvc atmdesc Pa
148. ax show rmon log Parameter None 5 3 106 show rmon statistic Description Display RMON statistic information Syntax show rmon statistic all lt number gt Parameter Name Description number RMON statistic entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 107 show route Description Display GBE routing table and default gateway Syntax show route Parameter None 5 3 108 show runningcfg Description Display running config Syntax show runningcfg Parameter None 236 5 3 109 show runningcfg interface xdsl Description Syntax Parameter Display running config by XDSL interface show runningcfg interface xdsl lt port gt Name Description XDSL Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory port 5 3 110 show runningcfg interface gigabit Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 111 show snmp Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 112 show sntp Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 113 show stp Description Syntax Parameter Display running config by Gigabit Ethernet interface or Link aggregation show runningcfg interface gigabit lt port gt la Name Description Gigabit port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory port Display SNMP community notify target setting show snmp community notify target None Display SNTP setting show sntp None Display spanning tree sho
149. ber gt Alarm interval Valid values 0 2147483647 0 disable Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 79 rmon alarm lt index gt delete Description Syntax Parameter Delete RMON alarm entry rmon alarm lt index gt delete lt number gt Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 262 5 4 80 rmon alarm lt index gt falling_eventindex Description Set RMON alarm falling event index Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt falling_eventindex lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt RMON alarm falling event index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 81 rmon alarm lt index gt falling_threshold Description Set RMON alarm falling threshold Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt falling_threshold lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt RMON alarm falling threshold Valid values 0 4294967295 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 82 rmon alarm lt index gt owner Description RMON alarm owner Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Owner name Valid values max 31 characters Defa
150. bit lt port gt stp Description Display Port Spanning Tree status of all Gigabit Ethernet interfaces or by Gigabit Ethernet port Syntax show interface gigabit lt port gt stp Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Optional 228 5 3 69 show interface gigabit lt port gt vlan Description Display VLAN information of all Gigabit Ethernet interface or by Gigabit Ethernet port Syntax show interface gigabit lt port gt vlan Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Optional 5 3 70 show interface gigabit la bridge Description Display link aggregation gigabit Ethernet bridge information Syntax show interface gigabit la bridge Parameter None 5 3 71 show interface gigabit la counter Description Display link aggregation gigabit Ethernet counter Syntax show interface gigabit la counter Parameter None 5 3 72 show interface gigabit la lacp Description Display gigabit Ethernet aggregator port information Syntax show interface gigabit la lacp Parameter None 5 3 73 show interface gigabit la vlan Description Display link aggregation Gigabit Ethernet vlan information Syntax show interface gigabit la vlan Parameter None 5 3 74 show lacp Description Display LACP information Syntax show lacp Parameter None 5 3 75 show mac spoofing detect confi
151. button to delete a community 166 4 5 2 SNMP Target This option allows you to configure the SNMP target to control where the SNMP traps notifications are sent Traps are used to report an alarm or other asynchronous event about a managed IDL 4802 system From the SNMP menu click on SNMP Target The following page is displayed SNMP Target Next No 2 New Target wel No 1 Addr 192 168 7 243 y Query Delete Modify y oi SNMP Community Setup Label Description New Click on this button to create a new SNMP target After you click on New the following page is displayed Type in the IP Address Name and Tag of the SNMP target Address Port Usually SNMP uses UDP port 161 for general SNMP messages and UDP port 162 for SNMP trap messages and select Trap Version V1 or V2c Then click on Apply button The Target Tag can be the same with a Notify Tag you can select the Notify Tag in the Use Notify Tag field The Notify Tag is created in the SNMP Notify table When the Target Tag is the same with a Notify Tag the SNMP notification with that Notify Tag is sent to the Target with the same tag SNMP Target 0 0 SnmpTargetNamet SnmpTargetList1 Target No Click on this drop down list and select the SNMP target number Query Select the target number and then click on this button to retrieve the information Delete Select the target number and then click on this button to de
152. cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 342 5 16 1 Tolani AAG RE 342 5 16 2 igmp acl del Peareeacena e Pome area ree 342 5 17 Rate Limit Profile Mode COMMANAS cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 343 5 17 1 A a a a E 343 5 17 2 shared e EE 343 5 17 3 let Ee EE 344 5 17 4 MOM Shale Ol as ase oii ee ee ate ae eae ora ha ace 344 5 18 Service Profile Configure Mode Commands ssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 346 5 18 1 Di ias 346 5 18 2 delay AR 346 5 18 3 o A ech iB a eee ead ee edad 346 5 18 4 A O OOO OO 346 5 18 5 NOISE crio 347 5 18 6 NOS CMA EE 347 5 18 7 AMV A A 347 5 18 8 service Marat o 347 5 19 Spectrum Profile Configure Mode Commands ccoonmncccccnnnncnccnnnanancnnnonnnano 348 5 19 1 A O A O OS 348 5 19 2 bands lt index gt Start erop 348 5 19 3 bands lt index gt MASK eege 348 5 19 4 CAM MASK 349 5 19 5 MESSI DEE 349 5 19 6 A O 349 5 19 7 lef le 350 5 19 8 oli 350 5 19 9 leiere 350 5 19 10 power mgt dsable EE 350 5 19 11 power Mgt 12 enable ee 350 5 19 12 power mgt D D enable sek 351 5 19 13 POWer MOt 1O tIME oooooooccccccccccccconananoncnnnonccnnnnnnnnrncncnnnnnnns 351 5 19 14 power mot 12 THIME EE 351 5 19 15 power Mgt air 351 5 19 16 lee ue Ae EE 352 5 19 17 ele 352 5 19 18 PUSO tosco eerste 352 5 19 19 rxaggregate US Max powerlevel AAA 353 5 19 20 Spectrum NAME coocococananancnononononononananonena recono sanan n enana renananana 353 5 19 21 status modify complete AEN 353
153. ce Problems Problem indication No POTS service to the affected subscribers ADSLx service is ok 1 Check the connection of the POTS lines at the POTS connector for the DSLAM 2 Use a bridging connector to couple the POTS and subscriber lines If this solves the problem replace the DSLAM 3 Check the condition of the POTS lines and connectors Procedure 6 Subscriber Service Problems Problem indication No POTS and ADSLx service to the affected subscribers 1 Check the connection of the subscriber lines and POTS lines at the subscriber line connector for DSLAM for subscribers that do not have POTS and ADSLx service If this step results in POTS service to the affected subscribers but there is still no ADSLx service to them follow Procedure 4 to troubleshoot ADSLx service problems If this step results in ADSL service to the affected subscribers but there is still no POTS service to them follow Procedure 5 to troubleshoot POTS service problems 2 Use a bridging connector to couple the POTS and subscriber lines If this results in POTS service to the affected subscribers contact your provider 3 Check the condition of the subscriber lines and connectors 363
154. cess list sremac Description Display all source mac address deny access list or by index Syntax show access list srcmac lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Source MAC deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 215 5 3 13 show account Description Display system account list detail information Syntax show account detail Parameter None 5 3 14 show aging Description Display bridge aging time Syntax show aging Parameter None 5 3 15 show alarm current Description Display current alarm list Syntax show alarm current Parameter None 5 3 16 show alarm event Description Display event list Syntax show alarm event Parameter None 5 3 17 show alarm history Description Display alarm history list Syntax show alarm history Parameter None 5 3 18 show alarm aco Description Display ACO status Syntax show alarm aco Parameter None 5 3 19 show atmdesc Description Display ATM descriptor Syntax show atmdesc Parameter None 216 5 3 20 show atm loopback Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 21 show cli config Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 22 show cluster Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 23 show cpu Description Syntax Parameter Display ATM loopback status by port show atm loopback lt port gt Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Optional lt port gt
155. ch PLANET Note 1 Ensure that all power sources to the device are turned off during the installation 2 lt is recommended that the 48VDC power be supplied directly and independently by a power feeding system and also avoid having a parallel or mutual connection with other 48 VDC power supplier of telecom equipment This is to guarantee our products against interferences by other equipment while they are working Ground Connections 24 E In Central Office Ther should be a co gnd that is adequately grounded If the measured resistance from the grounding screw on the rear panel of the dslam refer to below figure to co gnd is less than 5 ohm then it can be assumed that the system is well grounded If the measured resistance is larger than 5 ohm it is recommended to connect the grounding screw to co gnd using 14 or 12 awg wire gauge conductor m In Remote Cabinet The IDL 4802 should be grounded by connecting a 14 or 12 AWG conductor between the grounding screw on the rear panel of the DSLAM refer to below figure and the earth ground or main grounding bar The resistance between the chassis and the grounding bar should be less than 25 Ohm Grounding Screw of IDL 4802 48 25 2 FAN Cable Connection T re EE H 0200000000000000000000000 1000000000000000000000000a There are two FAN ports on the front panel One is on the FAN card the other is beside the
156. cnccnncnnccnnnns 268 rmon event lt iNdex gt fvpe EE 268 rmon history lt index gt buckets_requested eeeeeeeeeeees 268 rmon history lt index gt delete en 269 rmon history lt index gt WC 269 rmon history lt index gt interval EE 269 rmon history lt index gt OWNED eeeee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeees 270 rmon statistic lt index gt deleie un 270 rmon statistic lt index gt env dica 270 rmon statistic lt iIndex gt OWNET EE 271 OU 271 FOULS Get iii 271 ele A A nares 272 runningcfg active partition EE 272 runningcfg load Rente E 272 UNICO LO EE 273 runningcfg write Partition ceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 273 SNMP lt index gt Community 273 A r acc T 274 snmp target lt name gt address un 274 snmp target lt name gt delete cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 274 snmp target lt name gt tag liSt ee 275 snmp target lt NAME gt version ccccccccnnnonononnncnnnnccnnnnnnananonons 275 sntp polling Hl EE 275 sntp server address E 276 SPA Aaa os 276 stp Eelere eet lil 276 SIP CISGDIG Eeer ee 276 Gren 276 ST SUG TUNIS sico 277 SUD max ADS E 277 Stp PO asias id orden 277 SIP VOI ee Ee 277 EA cere pieen laremeeisepintenddoncneccepineendtenotendes 278 e ee EE 278 tem eelere D 278 ei ee WEE 278 een Ee eet e LEE 278 tOM EE 279 e innm 279 temperature threshold ENNEN 279 temperature shelf time EEN 280 time GE eege 280 time SETTING EE 281 time EE O e 281 A
157. col TCP IP Properties pement General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 1 10 Subnet mask bk 255 255 255 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server gt 34 2 3 2 WEB Configuration Procedure Step 1 Using your WEB Browser Open web browser and type http 192 168 1 1 in the browser s address box This IP is the default MGMT IP address of IDL 4802 Press Enter Cannot find server Microsoft Internet Explorer k Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qe x a Lei ya Search SL Favorites B E E 3 Address http 192 168 1 1 EJ co Step 2 Login the IDL 4802 A login page will appear Please type your username password and click Sign in The default username password is admin admin Web Interface Login Username admin Password seess ES a Level 1 SuperUser R W Management all Level 2 Engineer R W Disabled from User Account a Level 3 Guest Read only After you login the IDL 4802 you will see the system information as below System Information ACCESS LOGIN D opp o Access Level System Date FW Boot ActiveDB Cwrent DB Super user 2009
158. d UNI 3 1 interfaces see atmNoClpScr Create Click on this button to create a new traffic descriptor When you want to delete a traffic descriptor click on the radio button Delete beside the row number to select the traffic descriptor and then click on the Delete button Note that the default profile cannot be deleted 165 4 5 SNMP 4 5 1 SNMP Community This option allows you to configure the SNMP community that is the group that IDL 4802s and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group and serve as form of authentication From the SNMP menu click on SNMP Community The following page is displayed SNMP Community pubic Readiris E SNMP Community Setup Label Description Click on this button to create a new SNMP community After you click on New the following page is displayed Type in the name of the SNMP community up to 63 characters note that community names beginning with a digital number are not allowed and select the access mode Read only or Read Write Then click on Apply button SNMP Community New Next No 2 Apply Back Snmp Community Name SnmpCommunityName2 Access Mode Readonly y Access S E Mode Select the SNMP community access mode Read only or Read Write Modify Click on this button to modify the community name Delete Select an index and then click on this
159. d shows the current system temperature Up Shift Threshold C The system will produce notification alarm when the monitored system temperature is higher than Up Shift Threshold 55 85 C for over Up Shift Time 1 255 sec Up Shift Time Sec Refer to the description for Up Shift Threshold Down Shift Threshold C The system will produce notification alarm when the monitored system temperature is lower than Down Shift Threshold 55 85 C for over Down Shift Time 1 255 sec Down Shift Time Sec Refer to the description for Down Shift Threshold Fan ON Threshold C FAN Enable temperature threshold 40 15 C When the system temperature is higher than the threshold the fan will be turned on automatically Fan Shift Time Sec This field shows the elapsed time since the FAN was turned on 186 4 6 6 Performance Monitoring 4 6 6 1 System Utilization T This option allows you to monitor the memory utilization and network processor utilization From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then System Utilization The following page is displayed System Utilization Current Memory Utilization Current CPU Utilization 187 4 6 6 2 Ethernet Statistics This option allows you to view the Gigabit Ethernet counter values for the trunk or line interface From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then Ethernet Statist
160. d successfully test result is displayed as follows ADSL Dual End Loop Test Port 2 y Diagnostics Run Diagnostics Abort Dual Attainable BitRate Loop Attn Signal Attn SNR Margin Actual Tx Power FE Port DS kbps US kbps DS db US db DS db US db DS db US db DS db US db OOP DIAGNOS IMPLETED Carrier Type TSS SNR aln HUNC Hoer The TSS formula tss value 1 32768 The Transmit Spectrum Shaping for the Downstream direction as exchanged at init Near END ET AAA ee a ln be Ee AA Ke Lee Wek eea eee een ee AE e e31 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3275 3492 3723 3967 4085 4552 4957 5183 5545 5916 6310 6747 7193 7665 32 63 8235 32761 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32763 32768 32769 32768 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 54 95 32761 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32763 32768 32762 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 95 127 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 32763 32763 32763 32769 32769 32762 32762 32769 32769 3769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32763 109 159 32769 32763 32763 32769 32763 32763 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32769 32
161. d to a suitable ground point A Ensure that 48 Vdc power is being supplied to the DSLAM 5 Ensure that the fan card is installed 6 Ensure that the POTS lines subscriber lines and alarm equipment are connected 7 Slide the power switch on the faceplate to ON 8 Watt for a minute and then check the LEDs on the DSLAM If the LEDs show some problem refer to section 3 2 for information on how to resolve problems indicated through LEDs Procedures of Powering Down the DSLAM Step Action Caution Powering down the DSLAM stops DSL service to subscribers POTS service is not affected mb Put on the antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounding point 2 Slide the power switch on the faceplate to Off 358 Replacing Units This section provides procedures on how to replace the fan card replace as required replace the air filter replace every three months Air Filter FAN Card Procedure 1 Replace the Fan Card Danger When removing the fan card wait for a moment for the fan blades to come to a complete stop before fully extracting the fan card 1 Put on the antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounding point 2 Slide the power switch of the DSLAM to the OFF position Remove the fan card to be replaced by doing the following steps a Turn the two screws on the faceplate of the fan card counterclockwise until they loosen the connection of the fan card to the DSLAM b Pull th
162. dded VID Vian Tag solation Priority E 5 Tagged D on D Reserved e Ta Bo co Create gt Tagged on y Reserved y GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE 96 SHOW VLAN In the following page type in the VID and then click on Query All the bridge ports belonging to the VLAN and the configuration data of these ports will be displayed in the table Static VLAN CONFIG VLAN SHOW VLAN GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE 97 4 2 2 2 Protocol Base VLAN This option allows you to configure the protocol based VLAN table From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then Protocol Base VLAN The following page is displayed Select the checkboxes of the entries you want to create or delete To create a new entry type in the VLAN ID and select the EtherType protocol If you select Other for EtherType type the EtherType value in the rightmost field Protocol Base VLAN a Paget of 4 y Create Delete Query PPPoE Discovery Stage Me PPPoE Session Stage ba m m m m m o ee 98 4 2 2 3 Translation VLAN This option allows you to configure the translation VLAN table which defines some special VLAN working rules such as VLAN stack VLAN cross connect etc Before you configure the Translation VLAN table for a line bridge port you shall configure the Static VLAN table for this line bridge port and the GIGA bridge port in advance Also you shall disable VLAN stacking feature of this line bridge port in
163. dex Click on the radio button beside the Index profile index to select the profile you want to modify Note that profile 1 default cannot be modified Select Index This is a threshold value that is the minimum packet size before the SE SE system leaving the L2 low power state Valid value is 0 32 Direction DS downstream US upstream Min Minimum bit rate during show time Planned Planned bit rate during setup BitRate Max Maximum bit rate during show time L2 Min Minimum bit rate during L2 low power state DownShift Noise Margin dB Min Interval sec Decrease net data rate if Noise Margin is below the Downshift Noise Margin for DownShift Min Interval UpShift Noise Margin dB Min Interval sec Increase net data rate if Noise Margin is above the Upshift Noise Margin for Upshift Min Interval Interleaving MaxDelay Maximum interleaving delay 1 63 ms IMP 0 8 symbols Minimum impulse noise protection 0 0 8 0 dB 148 4 3 1 3 Spectrum Main Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL spectrum profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Spectrum Profile main The following page is displayed ADSL Spectrum Profile Select Index ja A y Query Modity Delete The First Index is default profile can t modify amp delete OP Mode 1 Carrier Mask 1 RF Pwr Management Message ea E LOTime L2ATPR Direction de mn 0 31 0 51 1 db Min
164. display the table entries List by VID amp Group IP IGMP Group IGMP Type Group y List by VID amp Group IP y wi 1 Group IP 224 11 2 Query IGMP Group List by VID amp Group IP Label Description VID Type in the VLAN ID 1 4094 Group IP Type in the IGMP group IP address Query Click on this button to display the table entries 143 IGMP Type gt Source This option allows you to query the Source IP which is the IP address of the source that is joining a multicast group on an interface This option is available only when IGMP version 3 is selected for the system s IGMP configuration IGMP Source IGMP Type Source VID 1 Group IP 224 1 1 2 No From IGMP Source Label Description VID Type in the VLAN ID 1 4094 Group IP Type in the IGMP group IP address No From To Type in the entry number range in the table Query Click on this button to display the table entries 144 4 2 8 IPOA 4 2 8 1 BRAS MAC The IDL 4802 supports an IPOA IPOE IWF Interworking Function This option allows you to setup the BRAS MAC address that is used by the IPOA IPOE IWF From the Bridge menu click on POA and then BRAS MAC The following page is displayed To add modify a MAC Select a checkbox beside an index and type in BRAS MAC address and then click on Modify button To delete a MAC Select a checkbox checkboxes beside the index and the
165. displayed This is the homepage of the Web Configuration Tool System Information ACCESS LOGIN Access Level System Date FW Boot Active DB Current DB Super user 2007 10 22 Partition 2 Partition 2 Partition 2 SYSTEM MAC Bridge MAC Gigal MAC Giga2 MAC 00 30 4F 71 1F F5 00 30 4F 71 10 FO 00 30 4F 71 1F FC SYSTEM VERSION Hardware Firmware Software Web Circuit 1 48 0 74808 0 74808 Uc 09 21d AnnexA IGA STATUS Gigal Giga2 LA SYSLED ALM LED Config Enabled Config Enabled Config Disabled o Kl Web Configuration Tool homepage 65 About Web Configuration Tool Pages The Web Configuration Tool provides a series of web pages for users to setup and configure the IDL 4802 System These pages are organized into six main topics including System Bridge ADSL Traffic SNMP and Maintenance You can select each topic from the menu on the left hand side of the main window Below table lists the various pages of the web configuration tool The exact information displayed on each web page depends on the specific configuration that an operator is using The following chapters provide a general description of the setup and configuration details Pages of the Web Configuration Tool System System Information Board IP Setup Ethernet Port Service ADSL Port Service CLI Setup Cluster Setup System Inventory SNTP IP Routes User Administration Duplicator Bridge GIGA Bridge ADSL PVC
166. e lt index gt 5 4 75 profile rate limit Description Syntax Parameter Enter this command to go to rate limit profile configuration mode profile tca xdsl lt index gt disable None 5 4 76 remotecfg login Description Syntax Parameter Login FTP server to get remote configuration and load it to running configuration or write remote configuration to memory remotecfg login lt ipv4 address gt get lt filename gt load write partition lt number gt Description IP address of TFTP server Name lt ipv4 address gt Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx Default value Type Mandatory xxx 0 255 lt filename gt Remote path and file name max 31 character Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 261 5 4 77 restore factory Description Syntax Parameter Restore factory setting Except out band IP address and user account all other configuration will be restored to factory default User needs to restart the system after restore factory to make the setting take effect restore factory None 5 4 78 rmon alarm lt index gt alarm_interval Description Syntax Parameter Set RMON alarm interval rmon alarm lt index gt alarm_interval lt number gt Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt num
167. e 48 Port ADSL 2 2 IP DSLAM IDL 4802 IDL 4802 48 User s Manual Copyright Copyright C 2009 PLANET Technology Corp All rights reserved The products and programs described in this User s Manual are licensed products of PLANET Technology This User s Manual contains proprietary information protected by copyright and this User s Manual and all accompanying hardware software and documentation are copyrighted No part of this User s Manual may be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form by any means by electronic or mechanical Including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use and without the prior express written permission of PLANET Technology Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccu
168. e gt Database The Database Configuration page is displayed Select the database configuration action you want to perform Database Configuration DB Contig Select Select y A Import File Write Download Config To Flash Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File button Database Configuration DB Config Select Ajlmport File Write Download Config To FLASH y TFTP Server p 172 16 10 241 File Name oonfigl Get File Write downloaded Config to Flash in progress Database Configuration DB Contig Select A import File Write Download Config To FLASH y ite flash at Partition2 y TFTP Server 1P J172 16 10241 File Name configl Get File 49 Write to memory successfully Database Configuration Ajlmport File Arite Download Config To FLASH e Partit GC EH Fail to Get File Ajlmport File Write Download Config To FLASH 172 16 10 28 43 B Import File Load Remote Config to Running Config Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download Then click on Get File button Database Configuration DB Config Select B import File Load Remote Config to Running Contig TFTP Server p 72 16 10 241 File Name onfizl Get File Load to Running Config successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select B lmport File Load Remote Contig to
169. e DescriptionSwitch to a NE network element in the cluster Syntax Parameter 5 1 3 cluster local Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 4 disable Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 5 end Description Syntax Parameter 5 1 6 exit Description Syntax Parameter cluster lt string gt Name Description NE name in the cluster you want to switch to Valid values string type value Default value lt string gt Type Mandatory Switch to Master in the cluster cluster local None Go to Disable execution mode from logoff mode disable None Return to Enable mode end None Go to previous execution mode exit None 209 5 1 7 help Description Display help Syntax help Parameter None 5 1 8 list Description Display all commands of current mode Syntax list Parameter None 5 1 9 list opmode Description List all the ADSL modes of operation Syntax listopmode Parameter None 5 1 10 system contact Description Set system contact Syntax system contact lt contact gt Parameter Name Description lt contact gt System contact Valid values string type value Max 63 characters Default value Type Optional 5 1 11 system location Description Set system location Syntax system location lt location gt Parameter Name Description lt location gt System location Valid values string type value Max 63 characters Default value
170. e Label Description HistIndex This field shows the History Table index The history identified by this index is the same history as identified by the same value of History Control index Samplelndex The Sample index uniquely identifies the particular Sample among all samples associated with the same History Control entry IntervalStart The value of System Up Time at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured System Up Time is the time since the network management portion of the system was last re initialized 195 RMON ETH History variables Variable Description Rx DropEvents Monitoring Rx dropped events Rx Bytes Monitoring Rx bytes packets Rx Packets Monitoring Rx packets Rx Broadcast Pkts Monitoring Rx broadcast packets Rx Multicast Pkts Rx CRC Align Errors Monitoring Rx multicast packets Monitoring Rx error alignment packets Rx Undersize Pkts Monitoring Rx undersize packets Rx Oversize Pkts Monitoring Rx oversize packets Rx Fragments Monitoring Rx fragments packets Rx Jabbers Monitoring Rx jabber packets Tx Collisions Monitoring Tx single collision packets Tx Bytes Monitoring Tx bytes Tx Packets Monitoring Tx packets Tx Multicast Pkts Monitoring Tx multicast Tx Broadcast Pkts Monitoring Tx broadcast Utilization Monitoring Tx Utilization 196 lt gt Al
171. e None Set link mode uplink mode or user mode link mode uplink user None Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis max mac lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Maximum number of the MAC addresses Valid values 1 4096 for GBE interface 1 128 for ADSL interface Default value 0 Type Mandatory VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter priority regen incoming lt incoming prio gt outgoing lt outgoing prio gt disable Name Description lt incoming prio gt Incoming VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt outgoing prio gt Outgoing VLAN priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory Enable disable VLAN stacking stack enable disable None 300 5 8 11 stpport edge Description Set edge status Syntax stpport edg enable disable Parameter None 5 8 12 stpport enable disable Description Enable Disable STP port Syntax stpport enable disable Parameter None 5 8 13 stpport pathcost Description Set STP port pathcost Syntax stpport pathcost lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Path cost value Valid values 1 65535 Default value 9 Type Mandatory 5 8 14 stpport priority Description Set STP port priority Syntax stpport priori
172. e lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Ether Type priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 88 show priority list ipprotocol Description Display IP Protocol VLAN priority list Syntax show priority list ipprotocol lt number gt Parameter Name Description number IP Protocol VLAN priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 89 show priority list srcip Description Display source IP address priority list Syntax show priority list srcip lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Source IP address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 232 5 3 90 show priority list srcmac Description Display source MAC address priority list Syntax show priority list srcmac lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Source MAC address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 91 show priority list tos Description Display ToS IP Precedence priority list Syntax show priority list tos lt number gt Parameter Name Description number ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 92 show priority list vlanid Description Display VLAN ID priority list Syntax show priori
173. e If the input AC voltage is over 10 lower than the standard may cause the IP DSLAM to malfunction gt gt Generally when installed after the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult for technical support gt gt A rare condition can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate building are interconnected the voltage potential can cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action before interconnecting the products If the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuit take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet location unless the jack is specially designed for wet location Never touch un insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Caution when installing or modifying telephone lines other than a cordless telephone during an electrical storm There is a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use a telephone or other equipment connected to telephone lines to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 22 2 2 Hardware Installation
174. e EE 243 5 4 6 SEENEN 243 5 4 7 alarm event legt eeegr seteesrgrueebtdoereek ges EEgESCSERE EeeEREeEueE Ce 243 5 4 8 alarm history EE 243 5 4 9 lte EE 243 5 4 10 o la ncaa a OA RA 244 5 4 11 cli config SESSION tithe e 244 5 4 12 e Ee e Ki e EE 244 5 4 13 EE te Reen EE 245 5 4 14 Cluster cfg management 245 5 4 15 el te BET 245 5 4 16 Cl Ster Cfg VON EE 245 5 4 17 cluster cfg Be le BEE 246 5 4 18 dsi line identify dhcp ee 246 5 4 19 dsl line identify dhcp option82 circuit cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 246 5 4 20 dsl line identify dhcp option82 delam name 246 5 4 21 dsl line identify dhcp option82 delam name custer 246 5 4 22 dsl line identify dhcp option82 dslam name customer 246 5 4 23 dsl line identify dhcp option82 sub 247 5 4 24 dsl line identify dhcp option82 remote 247 5 4 25 dsl line identify pppoe Sp name cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaees 247 5 4 26 dsl line identify pppoe Spv name check 247 5 4 27 fdbstatic lt number gt xdsl gigabit oooocccccincccccccccnnncccnnnnnns 248 5 4 28 fdbstatic lt number gt disable AAA 248 5 4 29 TOD SPAN G ISM EE 249 5 4 30 firmware Dootcode upgorade ccoooocccccccccccccnonanonanncnoncncnonanananancnos 249 5 4 31 A E N A 249 5 4 32 TIBI Ee re D 250 5 4 33 firmware upgrade caiste dao 250 5 4 34 o o E 250 5 4 35 o ae ea a a E S 250 5 4 36 A 250 5 4 37 igmp deny no ro ter ASI GE 251 5 4 38 iomp Te 251 5 4 39 5 4 40 5 4 41 5 4 42 5 4
175. e Maintenance menu click on SYS Log Server The following page is displayed System Log Server Modify Action Stop y Change Server Address SYS Log Server Setup Label Description Current Server IP This field shows the IP address of current Sys Log server Type in the new IP address of Sys Log server The server Change Server Address muetbea remote hast Modif To change SYS Log server address click on this button once y you have type in a new server IP address Click on this drop down list and select Start to start sending Action the Syslog messages to the server or Stop to stop sending the Syslog messages to the server 169 4 6 2 Database This option allows you to import export the configuration data From the Maintenance menu click on Database The following page is displayed Select the database configuration action you want to perform Database Configuration DB Contig Select Select y DB Configuration Concept Ampon File Write Download B Impert File Load Remote o A titi A A en Bo Download Config TFTP SERVER gt FALSH DEVICE ee System Contig2 Wan enananan ananananananan an ananananenan an ananananenananananananenananananananananananananenenananananananaranananananananenanan ananenanenananasasanananenansnanenes 170 A Import File Write Download Config To Flash Type in the TFTP Server I
176. e adsl ccci coccion ici 260 eigene et BEE 260 dene e E 261 profile rate Jmn een 261 remolecia O ias 261 restore factory EE 262 rmon alarm lt index gt alarM_ Intenal 262 rmon alarm lt index gt delete ee 262 rmon alarm lt index gt falling eventndenx 263 rmon alarm lt index gt falling_threShold coooooccnnnnnnnccncccnnnnccs 263 rmon alarm lt index gt owner oococcccccccccccnononooncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnnn 263 rmon alarm lt index gt rising_eventindexX ooococcccccccccncoccccccnnnncnn 264 rmon alarm lt index gt rising_threShold ooooooccccccoccccccnicacaccccnincno 264 rmon alarm lt index gt sample Ivpe occcccncccccccccccccccncnnnananancnnnnnnns 264 rmon alarm lt index gt startup_alarM ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 265 rmon alarm lt index gt variable 266 rmon event lt index gt Commun 267 rmon event lt index gt delete Ae 267 rmon event lt index gt description 267 9 5 4 91 5 4 92 5 4 93 5 4 94 5 4 95 5 4 96 5 4 97 5 4 98 5 4 99 5 4 100 5 4 101 5 4 102 5 4 103 5 4 104 5 4 105 5 4 106 5 4 107 5 4 108 5 4 109 5 4 110 5 4 111 5 4 112 5 4 113 5 4 114 5 4 115 5 4 116 5 4 117 5 4 118 5 4 119 5 4 120 5 4 121 5 4 122 5 4 123 5 4 124 5 4 125 5 4 126 5 4 127 5 4 128 5 4 129 5 4 130 5 4 131 5 4 132 5 4 133 5 4 134 5 4 135 5 4 136 5 4 137 5 4 138 5 4 139 one to one 5 4 140 many to one rmon event lt INGEX gt OWN ooccocconccnccncccnccncnnnncnccnncnnc
177. e fan card out about 2 inches and wait for a moment for the fan blades to stop completely c Pull the fan card completely out of the DSLAM and set it aside 4 Install the replacement fan card into the DSLAM by doing he following steps a Slide the replacement fan card into the fan card slot of the DSLAM b Turn the two screws on the faceplate of the fan card clockwise until they secure the fan card in place 359 Procedure 2 Replace the Air Filter oa BO N a Note You must loosen the connection of the fan card to the DSLAM and pull out the FAN card refer to Procedure 1 before replacing the air filter While you want to install the replacement filter remember that you have to insert the air filter into the chassis slot before inserting the FAN card Because you will not be able to insert the air filter after the FAN card is secured in place Put on the antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounding point Slide the power switch of the DSLAM to the OFF position Remove the fan card refer to Procedure 1 Pull the air filter out of the DSLAM Slide the replacement air filter into the air filter slot of the DSLAM Install the FAN card back in the chassis 360 Appendix D Introduction for Troubleshooting This chapter describes instructions for the IDL 4802 system problems These procedures may require the presence of technicians at remote IDL 4802 system sites and plus an operator at PC to monitor system alarms
178. e in the NE name in the cluster Domain Type in the name of the cluster domain Role Valid options are Cluster Master or Slave is decided by the system Slave only role of the DLSAM is always Slave and Individual not in a cluster Type in 0 or a positive integer as the priority to be Master 0 means to let system decides Master and Slaves If positive integer is typed in the smaller Votine Ke the number is the higher priority for the DSLAM to be a master in a cluster 8 sey But if there s already a Master in a cluster a new added DSLAM cannot try to be the Master by entering a smaller voting key number the Master cannot be changed in this way IP Type in the cluster IP address Users can connect to and manage the cluster via the cluster IP address through in band connection Netmask Type in the cluster s subnet mask Gateway Type in the cluster s gateway IP address Click on this radio button and click on Apply to control the DSLAM you re now Local directly connected it will be the Master DSLAM if you re connecting to the cluster via the cluster IP address ID This field shows Cluster ID which indicates cluster ordering Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to query current status Apply Once you have selected an entry NE in the cluster information table click on this button to apply your selection To control a member in the cluster Select a Cluster membe
179. ect Show specify source MAC deny access list entry Delete specify source MAC deny access list entry Syntax srcmac lt number gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la mac lt mac address gt srcmac lt number gt list srcmac lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt Source MAC deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx xx xx xXx xx xx xx 00 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory 5 12 20 srcmac list Description Display source MAC deny access list Syntax srcmac list Parameter None 322 5 13 ATM Description Mode Commands 5 13 1 cbr Description Syntax Parameter 5 13 2 no atmdesc Description Syntax Parameter CBR traffic setting cbr lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory Delete ATM Description no atmdesc l
180. ecting and thresholding performance parameter counters against 15 miniute intervals for each interface and module respectively Users can query the data of these parameters through CLI Web GUI or EMS Performance statistics include the following 1 Statistics for current interval A real time aspect contains the reflection of the current value situation before the new interval The current value includes values of current 15 min interval and current 1 day interval 2 Statistics history at 15 minute basis The system stores previous 96 statistics of PM parameters at 15 min interval for retrieving 3 Statistics history at 1 day basis The system stores previous 1 statistics of PM parameters at 1 day interval for retrieving Most of the performance parameter thresholds are user programmable The IDL 4802 uses a threshold crossing alert TCA to notify the management system when one of the counts during a measurement interval exceeds its threshold The TCA contains the following information Specific interface involved Error condition identifying the measurement type Value of the parameter Occurrence date and time of the event The performance management also provides the traffic counter including transmitted packets error packets and discarded packets for each interface network and subscriber interface and ATM cell counter in both transmit and receive direction Users can observe these data through CLI Web GUI or
181. ed lt number gt Name Description lt number gt TCM red color value Valid values 0 7 for VLAN priority color field 0 63 for DSCP color field Default value 7 Type Mandatory Set TCM yellow color value tem yellow lt number gt Name Description lt number gt TCM yellow color value Valid values 0 7 for VLAN priority color field 0 63 for DSCP color field Default value 3 Type Mandatory 5 4 131 temperature threshold Description Syntax Parameter Shelf temperature threshold temperature threshold up down fan lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Temperature threshold value Valid values up 55 85 Down 55 85 fan 40 15 Default value up 65 down 65 fan 40 Type Mandatory 279 5 4 132 temperature shelf time Description Shelf time Syntax temperature shelf time up down lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Shelf time value Valid values 1 255 Default value 10 Type Mandatory 5 4 133 time set date Description Set date of the system default is current system date Syntax time set date MM DD YY MM DD CCYY Parameter Name Description MM Month Valid values 01 12 Type Mandatory DD Day of month Valid values 01 31 Type Mandatory CC Century Valid values 0 Type Optional YY Short year start from 2000
182. ed for every bridge port will be limited Syntax igmp max group limit enable disable Parameter None 5 4 40 igmp proxy Description Enable GMP proxy snooping mode Syntax igmp proxy Parameter None 5 4 41 igmp snooping Description Enable IGMP normal snooping mode Syntax gmp snooping Parameter None 251 5 4 42 igmp rtport gigabit Description Set IGMP router port giga1 giga2 or link aggregation port and set IGMP router IP address Syntax igmp rtport gigabit lt port gt la vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable ip lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Set router IP address for proxy mode IGMP general query packet reference Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Optional 5 4 43 igmp rtport list Description Show IGMP router port list Syntax igmp rtport list lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 252 5 4 44 igmp timeout Description IGMP timeout setting BC LMQT MRT Query URI Syntax igmp timeout bc Imat mrt query uri lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Timeout value Valid v
183. elay times are constrained as follows 2 x forwarddelay 1 gt maxage gt 2 x hellotime 1 STP Bridge Settings Label Description Disable Enable Specify whether or not the system is to implement the spanning tree protocol Modify Once you have modified the parameters click on this button to submit the modification Version Select RSTP IEEE 802 1W or STP IEEE 802 1D Priority Sets the spanning tree protocol priority The lower the priority number the more significant the bridge becomes in protocol terms Where two bridges have the same priority their MAC address is compared and the smaller MAC address is treated as the most significant The priority can be any value between 0 and 61440 in step of 4096 Default value is 32768 MaxAge Sets the maximum age of received spanning tree protocol information before it is discarded This is used when the bridge is or is attempting to become the root bridge This can be any value in seconds between 6 and 40 BUT it is constrained by the hellotime and forwarddelay times 105 Default value is 20 Hello Time Sets the time after which the spanning tree process sends notification of topology changes to the root bridge This is used when the bridge is or is attempting to become the root bridge This can be any value in seconds between 1 and 2 BUT it is constrained by the maximum age and forwarddelay times Defa
184. emark Select GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Click on the VPRI Remark drop down list and select a type of VLAN Priority Remark Available options include Type of Service TOS IP Source IP Destination MAC Source MAC Destination VLAN ID VLAN Priority Regeneration Differentiated Services DSCP Protocol and Ether Type 115 TOS VLAN TOS Priority Remark PRI Remark 1 TOS y No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL y Port 1 y evc 1 y Priorty oun O y Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup TOS Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here No From To Query Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to retrieve Delete ADSL D Port 1 y evc 1 y To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port In order to provide basic support for classes of service to the Internet Protocol The IP protocol header contains what is known as the ToS TOS Type of Service bits Click on the drop down list and select incoming TOS value range O 7 then you can create the mapping between TOS and VLAN p
185. ent All page Modif Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify Change the y parameter values and then click on Modify Query Click on this button to get the most recent data 94 4 2 1 4 ADSL Port Security This option allows you to setup the ADSL port security From the Bridge menu click on Interface Setup and then ADSL Port Security The following page is displayed ADSL Port Security maxmac 4 mac Learning Enabled IP Allowed Disabled auf _Modity o 2 s 2 2 2 s 9 2 s S ADSL PVC CONFIGURATION STATIC VLAN You shall click on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC first Then the data of these PVCs bridge ports you selected will be displayed Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify ADSL Port Security Setup Label Description Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the ADSL bridge port 1 128 Select to enable disable MAC learning ability Sometimes you can disable MAC learning on specified bridge port This function is for 1 1 VLAN translation scenario Select to enable disable IP Allowed function When you enable IP Allowed function on a bridge port this bridge port will work according to the Static Allowed IP table Max MAC MAC Learning IP Allowed So you need to define the source IP addresses that bind to this bridge port Then the IP p
186. erface gigabit lt port gt bridge oooooooooccccccncccccccccccnncos 228 show interface gigabit lt port gt counter oooooccccccccncnccccccccaaannnos 228 show interface gigabit lt port gt Stp ooooonniccccccccnnnnncccnanccacnnnnos 228 show interface gigabit L oort lvlan 229 show interface gigabit la brdoe ssessssseeneneeeeseeerrrernn eneee 229 show interface gigabit la counter 229 show interface gigabit la lacp ENEE 229 show interface gigabit la van 229 SOW ee E 229 show mac spoofing detect confg 229 show mac spoofing detect Jop 230 show management all aiii In 230 SHOW management GNC EE 230 show management de EEN 230 SHOW management mgmt 230 Show pm lt port gt adsl day 230 show pm lt port gt adsl mier 231 show port template parameter ee 231 EEGENEN 231 show priority list dstip cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 231 Show priority list dStMaC E 232 show priority list ethertype AEN 232 show priority list pprotiocol cnn 232 SHOW PIlOMLY IIS SI CID DE 232 SHOW priority list Sremac EE 233 show priOrity list rose 233 show priority list vlanid cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 233 show priority queue config EE 233 SHOW PMOMY E DEE 233 show profile ele 234 show profile igmp acl cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 234 show profile rate limit poliCer oooooonccnnnnnncccccccccnncccnnnncnanncnos 234 show pr
187. ete An Interval_TCA s value range from O to 900 sec A Day_TCA s value range from 0 to 86400 Sec The int for Interval s 15Minute TCA and the day for Day s TCA The NE for Near_End and the FE for Far_End Sect 2 seect_ oe 2 poo fofopfo fo fo foto jn f o fo poo fo po fo fo fo fo fo fo f naf o Ae E ee IE IE ee ee RA ee e AAA A SO BE Ae 9 IS IS ee IO ee ee ee ee E ee ADSL TCA Threshold setup Label Description Paget of 16 D Click on this drop down list to select the page to be displayed Modify Once you have typed in new threshold values click on this button to submit the modification Delete Click on this button to delete a selected profile or profiles Select Click on the checkbox to select the profile you want to modify or delete Enable To issue TCA when the PM statistics exceed thresholds this profile must be enabled int day ESs NE FE Interval Day Errored Seconds near end far end int day SESs NE FE Interval Day Severely Errored Seconds near end far end int day UASs NE FE Interval Day Unavailable Seconds near end far end int LOS NE FE Interval Loss of Signal near end far end int LOF NE FE Interval Loss of Frame near end far end int LOPWR FE Interval Loss of Power far end int LOL NE Interval Loss of Link near end int ErrFrm NE FE Interval Error Frame near end far end 154 4 3 2 Data am
188. etup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No From To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Query Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table aos y Port 1 y fevc 1 y Destination IP Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Type in the Destination IP address MASK Type in the subnet mask Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 112 Destination MAC Filtering Destination MAC Filtering Filtering Typel Destination MAC y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 2 Destination MAC foo foo foo foo foo foo Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Destination IP Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No From To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Once you have specified the serial number click on this Query F button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter ru
189. ex of the Spectrum Profile 1 120 TCA Profile Type in the index of the TCA Profile 1 64 All Select the check box to select all circuits of current page Modify Click on this button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to get most recent status of the circuits Select Click on the radio button to select the port to be modified Current Status This field shows the operational status of the line ports Possible values are ON enabled OFF disabled and Testing in loop testing now 74 4 1 5 CLI Setup This option allows you to modify the timeout setting for a CLI session and the allowable number of CLI sessions From the System menu click on CL Setup CLI Setup Default Modify CLI Session range from 1 to 10 5 CLI Timeout range from 180 to 36007 200 CLI Setup Label Description Allowable number of CLI sessions at the same time Valid id value 1 10 CLI Timeout CLI session will be closed once the idle time exceeds this timeout value Valid value 180 3600 sec Default Click on this button to set default values CLI session 5 CLI timeout 300 sec Modify Click on this button to submit the modification 75 4 1 6 Cluster Setup This option allows you to setup Cluster function which can make a group of NEs network elements work together as a single NE from the management point of view Before you gro
190. f alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 340 5 15 4 alarm minor Description Set the level of the alarm to Minor Syntax alarm minor lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name of alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 341 5 16 IGMP ACL Profile Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the IGMP ACL Profile execution mode 5 16 1 igmp acl Description IGMP group ACL Setting IP and VLAN Delete channel setting Syntax igmp acl lt number gt lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt delete Parameter Name Description lt number gt IGMP ACL channel index Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt IGMP group address Valid values 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The range of addresses from 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 is reserved for the use of routing protocols and other low level topology discovery or maintenance protocols Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 16 2 igmp acl rebind Description IGMP ACL Profile rebind Syntax igmp acl rebind Parameter None 342 5 17 Rate Limit Profile Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Rate Limit Profile execution
191. g Description Display MAC Spoofing Detect configuration Syntax show mac spoofing detect config Parameter None 229 5 3 76 show mac spoofing detect log Description Display MAC Spoofing Detect log Syntax show mac spoofing detect log Parameter None 5 3 77 show management all Description Display all system management port ip setting Syntax show management all Parameter None 5 3 78 show management dhcp Description Display DHCP client setting Syntax show management dhcp Parameter None 5 3 79 show management gbe Description Display GBE management port ip setting Syntax show management gbe Parameter None 5 3 80 show management mgmt Description Display MGMT management port ip setting Syntax show management mgmt Parameter None 5 3 81 show pm lt port gt adsl day Description Display performance monitoring data for previous 1 day or current day Syntax show pm lt port gt adsl day lt number gt current Parameter Name Description port Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory number Day number Valid values 1 1 Default value Type Mandatory 230 5 3 82 show pm lt port gt adsl interval Description Syntax Parameter Display performance monitoring data for previous 1 96 intervals or current interval show pm lt port gt adsl interval lt number gt current Name Description port Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value
192. gScrCavt vbr3 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt scr lt scr gt mbs lt mbs gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt SCI gt Sustained Cell Rate Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt mbs gt Maximum Burst Size Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 327 5 13 9 ubr shp Description Syntax Parameter 5 13 10 cbr shp Description Syntax Parameter UBR shaped traffic setting atmNoClpNoScr ubr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory CBR shaped traffic setting atmCloTransparentNoScr cbr shp lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type
193. gt gigabit lt port gt la vlan lt VLAN ID gt vlanid lt number gt list vlanid lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Vlan id priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID number Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory Show VLAN id priority list vlanid list None 339 5 15 Alarm Profile Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Alarm Profile execution mode 5 15 1 alarm mask Description Mask the alarm Syntax alarm mask lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name of alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 5 15 2 alarm unmask Description Unmask the alarm Syntax alarm unmask lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name of alarm Valid values Refer to Appendix B Alarm Table Default value Type Mandatory 5 15 3 alarm major Description Set the level of the alarm to Major Syntax alarm major lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt Name o
194. gt startup_alarm rising falling both Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 265 5 4 87 rmon alarm lt index gt variable Description Variable Source sample in statistic table Description rx_broadcast Monitoring rx broadcast packets rx_bytes Monitoring rx bytes packets rx_dropped Monitoring rx dropped packets rx_err_aligment Monitoring rx error aligment packets rx_fragments rx_jabber Monitoring rx fragments packets Monitoring rx jabber packets rx_multicast Monitoring rx multicast packets rx_oversize Monitoring rx oversize packets rx_packets Monitoring rx packets rx_undersize Monitoring rx undersize packets tx_single_collision Monitoring tx single collision packets txrx_frames_ 64 Monitoring tx 64 octets txrx_frames_127 Monitoring tx 65 to 127 octets txrx_ frames 255 Monitoring tx 128 to 255 octets txrx_ frames 511 Monitoring tx 256 to 511 octets txrx_frames_1023 Monitoring tx 512 to 1023 octets txrx_ frames_1518 Monitoring tx 1024 to 1518 octets Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt variable rx_broadcast rx_bytes rx_dropped rx_err_aligment rx_fragments rx_jabber rx_multicast rx_oversize rx_packets rx_undersize index lt number gt rmon alarm lt index gt variable
195. h Profile and RFCs 2697 8 2698 Our TCM Policer supports both Color Aware and Color Blind modes The color is used for determining whether a packet will proceed to the policer when TCM Policer works in Color Aware mode also in the policer the packet may be remarked with new color according to the packet s conformance to the policer rules A packet is considered green when it enters the TCM Policer only if its input color field VLAN priority bits or DSCP field has the same value with the green value configured in this page see the following figure and parameter description Likewise a packet is considered yellow only if its input color field has the same value with the yellow value configured in this page All other values are considered red Once a packet has passed through the TCM Policer it will be directed to the class queues for scheduling Rate Limit Three Color Marking Rate Limit Type Three Color Marking y If the Color Field is YLA4N Priority mode then the Colors Value are 0 7 H the Color Field is DSCP mode then the Colors Value range are 0 63 Modify Query DYLAN Priority Y Rate Limit Policer Binding Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup Once you have finished setting the parameter values click on this button to submit bell the modification Query Click on this button to get most recent data Color aware mode the
196. he Bridge menu click on Access Control and then Priority Queue Mapping The following page is displayed Priority Queue Mapping Modify Query eighted range from 1 255 sra y sra 40 mo o om Queue el Queue6 Queue 5 Queue 4 Queue 3 Queue 2 Queue 0 Queue i e The queues for Giga and ATM interfaces are different Giga Each Giga interface has 4 Queues and these queues can only work on Strict Priority Queuing SPQ scheduling The priorities of these queues are Q3 gt Q2 gt Q1 gt Q0 ATM Each ATM PVC bridge interface on each ADSL port has 8 Queues and can work in SPQ or SPQ WFQ mix mode For SPQ the priorities of these queues are Q7 gt Q6 gt Q5 gt Q4 gt Q3 gt Q2 gt Q1 gt Q0 For SPQ WFQ mixed the priority of SPQ queues Q7 Q4 is higher than WFQ queues Q3 Q0 And Q7 Q4 are for SPQ and the priorities are Q7 gt Q6 gt Q5 gt Q4 Q3 QO are for WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing and you can define the weight value for Q3 Q0 Note that if each queue has different weight value the system will work as WFQ mode If all queues have the same weight value the system will work as Weighted Round Robin WRR mode The system allows 8 priority levels fully work as WFQ or WRR mode via using queues of Q3 O0 only in the Priority Queue Mapping table 133 4 2 5 Forwarding 4 2 5 1 TP Forwarding DB This option allows you to retrieve the status of the transparent
197. he CPE will establish the ADSL connection with IDL 4802 You can check the connection status as below figure The Current Status is ON Now the clients can access to Internet through IDL 4802 Spectrum Profi 1 TCA Profile 1 o O O O v O o O O 9 O O SERVICE PROFILE SPECTRUM PROFILE TCA PROFILE 38 Step 6 Save the running configuration to Flash Remember to save your running configuration to the flash otherwise the settings will be lost if you power off IDL 4802 Go to Maintenance gt Database setting screen select the D Save Running Config to Flash System Config There are two partitions on flash select your Partition which you want to save and click Write Running The configuration will save to the Flash Note Default Partition is Partition1 DB Contiq Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config E tte flash at Partition Y 39 2 3 3 How to backup Restore the Configuration Configuration Import Export The IDL 4802 provides the configuration preservation feature that the configuration database is stored in flash memory two partitions available In addition to the configuration preservation feature the IDL 4802 also provides the configuration export import feature A Import File Write Download B lmport File Load Remotes MA loeo C Expert File D Save Running E Rcload FLASH
198. he alarm level Valid values are Fee MJ major alarm MN minor alarm State This field shows the alarm state Set or Clear Sequential Sequential number Time Alarm occurring date and time 183 Event Log Type in the range of rows and then click on the Query button Event Log Alarm Event Select Event Log y Query Clear Event Giga 1 TRUNK_CARD_CLUSTER_CHANGED Giga 1 TRUNK_CARD_CLUSTER_CHANGED Event Log Label Description Query Click on this button to query most recent event log Clear Event Click on this button to clear the event log Row This field shows the row number ID This field shows the event ID Description This field shows the description for the event Sequential Sequential number Time Event occurring date and time 184 4 6 5 2 Alarm Profile This option allows you to view and update the alarm profiles From the Maintenance menu click on Fault Management and then Alarm profile The Alarm Profile page is displayed Click on the Select Page drop down list and select a page to display To modify an alarm profile click on the radio button beside the alarm ID select the Level Major Minor Mask Unmask and then click on the Modify button You can also select the ALL ID checkbox to modify all alarm types at a time Alarm Profile Selected Alarm ID 101 SYS_HOUSEKEEP1 Levet MINOR zl unmask zl ALL D 7 _Modify D Type Level Mask ID Type
199. her hand the S tag will be removed from all the downstream outgoing frames Note When an untagged frame enters the IDL 4802 it is assigned the default PVID of the ingress incoming bridge port and become a single tagged frame no matter VLAN stacking is enabled or not Set Ingress ON check if the VID of the incoming frame is in the member set If not in the member set block the frame Ingress Set Ingress OFF Ingress filter disabled AccErm Click on the drop down list and select to accept ALL Frame only VLAN tagged frame or only Untagged frame ON OFF to enable disable isolation When port isolation is enabled packets Isolation received from a line bridge port including trunk interface configured as user link cannot be forwarded to any other line bridge port even for broadcasting Priority Force Click on the drop down list and select the priority forcing mode Options are Disabled Reserve the original priority of all packets Ingress Force applying the default VLAN priority value to all the packets received on this bridge port so this rule will work on all the member set of this bridge port Egress Force the priority value of all packets sent out from this bridge port s default VLAN to be the default VLAN priority so this rule only works on default VLAN of this bridge port Both Combine the rules of Ingress and Egress Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in curr
200. ics Click on the leftmost drop down list to select interface giga port or DSL line port if line interface is selected you must further click on the middle and rightmost drop down list to select the line port number and PVC number At last click on Query to get data of that interface GBE interface sica Port y Statistics Name Giga Port 1 Giga Port 2 MTU Size 1536 1536 Queue LEN 0 0 Last Change 0 0 Specification L L Description Giga Ethernet Giga Ethernet Input Bytes 0 11839066 Input Broadcast Packets 0 0 Input Discard Packets 0 5729 Input Multicast Packets 0 295 Input Unicast Packets 0 0 Input Not Unicast Packets 0 295 Input Error Packets 0 0 Input Unknown Protocol Packets 0 0 Output Bytes 1870016 1814916 Output Broadcast Packets 2882 2882 Output Discard Packets 2 2 Output Multicast Packets 0 0 Output Unicast Packets 0 0 Output Not Unicast Packets 2882 2882 Output Error Packets 0 0 188 ADSL line PVC Prost For Z Pros por 3 ve Statistics Name MTU Size Queue Length put Unknown Protocol Packets utput Bytes jutput Broadcast Packets Output Discard Packets Output Unicast Packets Output Not Unicast Packets Output Error Packets 189 4 6 6 3 ATM Statistics This option allows you to query the ATM Statistics From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then ATM Statistics The following page i
201. in this section can be executed only in the IPoA configure mode 5 11 1 brasmac Description Syntax Parameter 5 11 2 brasmac list Description Syntax Parameter 5 11 3 cpriority Description Syntax Parameter 5 11 4 cvlan Description Syntax Parameter Display Broadband RAS MAC address by index brasmac lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Broadband RAS MAC Table Index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory Show Broadband RAS MAC address table brasmac list None Customer VLAN Priority setting cpriority lt prio ID gt Name Description lt prio ID gt Customer VLAN Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory Customer VLAN setting cvlan lt VLAN ID gt Name Description lt prio ID gt Customer VLAN ID number Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 310 5 11 5 ipoa status Description Syntax Parameter 5 11 6 max mac Description Syntax Parameter 5 11 7 pve Description Syntax Parameter 5 11 8 pvc atmdesc Description Syntax Parameter IPoA Status setting enable disable IPoA ipoa status enable disable None Port based allowed maximum number of MAC addresses max mac lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Number of MAC addresses Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory Set VPI and VCI pvc l
202. interface through both in band and out band channels e Support up to 10 CLI sessions at the same time The in band management connection of the system is the highest priority of all supported in band traffic categories e Support out band management via UART at full duplex line rate of 9600 bps Craft port 10 100 base T Ethernet e Support Telnet interface for remote operators to login system operating console e Support up to 32 configurable SNMP trap destinations and allow the SNMP traps to be sent to any specified SNMP aware device for instance Network management center 54 3 2 Configuration Management The configuration management contains the following aspects 1 System Setup such as setup for management IP address net mask GBE interface including to enable disable and query the administrative operational status of the trunk port line port including to enable disable reset ADSL port query the administrative operational status of the port and bind profiles on a per port basis CLI session and timeout Cluster SNTP IP routes and user administration including login authorization and provides three security levels Bridge Configuration see Bridge Configuration below for more description ADSL Configuration see ADSL configuration below for more description Se E e ATM traffic management 5 SNMP setup The configuration management provides detecting and reporting to the operators through
203. into the L2 low power state Syntax power mgt 0 time lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt LO Time value Valid values 0 255 sec Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 14 power mgt I2 time Description Set minimum time in seconds between an Entry into L2 low power state and the first L2 low power trim request and between two consecutive L2 power trim requests Syntax power mgt 2 time lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt L2 Time value Valid values 0 255 sec Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 15 power mgt I2 atpr Description Set maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is allowed at transition of LO to L2 state or an L2 low power trim request Syntax power mgt 2 atpr lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt L2 power reduction range value Valid values 0 31 dB Default value Type Mandatory 351 5 19 16 power mgt I2 atprt Description Set total maximum aggregate transmit power reduction in dB that is allowed in the L2 state the total reduction is the sum of all reductions of L2 Request i e at transition of LO to L2 state and L2 power trims Syntax power mgt 2 atprt lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt L2 total power reduction value Valid values 0 31 dB Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 17 psd
204. ion Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 58 show interface xdsl all lt port gt bridge Description Syntax Parameter Display Bridge information by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt bridge Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 59 show interface xdsl all lt port gt cellcount Description Syntax Parameter Display ATM cell counter by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt cellcount Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 5 3 60 show interface xdsl all lt port gt counter Description Syntax Parameter Display Ethernet packet counter by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt counter Name Description Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt 226 5 3 61 show interface xdsl all lt port gt ipoa Description Display IPoA RFC 2684 information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl all lt port gt ipoa Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 62 show interface xdsl all lt port gt vc Description Display VC information by Bridge port Syntax show interface xdsl
205. ion Syntax Parameter 5 4 116 stp Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 117 stp enable Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 118 stp disable Description Syntax Parameter Set SNTP server ip address snmp server address lt ipv4 address gt Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address of SNTP server Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory STP set default stp default None Enable Spanning Tree Protocol STP stp enable None Disable Spanning Tree Protocol STP stp disable None 5 4 119 stp forward delay Description Syntax Parameter Set STP forward delay stp forward delay lt number gt Name Description STP forward delay value Valid values 4 30 Default value Type Mandatory number 276 5 4 120 stp hello time Description Set STP hello time Syntax stp hello time lt number gt Parameter Name Description number STP hello time value Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 121 stp max age Description Set STP maximum age Syntax stp max age lt number gt Parameter Name Description number STP maximum age value Valid values 6 40 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 122 stp priority Description Set STP priority value Syntax stp priority lt number gt Parameter Name Description number STP priority value Valid value
206. ion Write running configuration to memory Syntax runningcfg write partition lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 108 snmp lt index gt community Description Set SNMP read only or read write community string Syntax snmp lt index gt community ro rw lt community gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt SNMP community index Valid values 1 32 Default value Type Mandatory lt community gt Community string max 63 character note that community names beginning with a digital number are not allowed Default value public Type Mandatory 273 5 4 109 snmp notify Description Set SNMP notify information Delete SNMP notify tag Syntax snmp notify lt name gt tag lt tag gt delete Parameter Name Description lt name gt Notify name string max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt tag gt Notify Tag string max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 110 snmp target lt name gt address Description Set SNMP target address Syntax snmp target lt name gt address lt ipv4 address gt port lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt SNMP target name Valid values max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Target IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx
207. ion of far end hlin downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlin Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 39 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlog Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of far end hlog downstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe ds hlog Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 40 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us load Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of far end load upstream by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us load Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 41 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us gain Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of far end gain upstream by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier fe us gain Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 221 5 3
208. is drop down list and select the type of Circuit ID Options are DEFAULT CUSTOMER DEFAULT means our system defined default type lt DSLAM name gt lt circuit number gt lt vpi gt lt vci gt CUSTOMER means the customer defined type Remote ID Type Click on this drop down list and select the format of Remote ID Options are DEFAULT Line ID ADSL line identifier Line Desc description for the line Line Phone phone number CUSTOMER DEFAULT means our system default format which is DSLAM name port_id bridge_id CUSTOMER means the customer defined format customer can type in any word not exceeding 48 characters For Line ID the format is port_id bridge_id Port Identifier For Line Desc the format is port_id bridge_id Port Description For Line Phone the format is port_id bridge_id Port Phone Number The Port Identifier Description and Phone Number are set in the ADSL line information table Set Once you have changed the setting of any one of the parameters DHCP Mode ID Select CKT Type Remote Type DLSAM Name Service Name remember to click on Set to submit the modification DSL Line ID Configu ration 123 evo E Click on these drop down lists to select the bridge ports to be displayed Port 01 12 y PYC 1 a A these bridge ports must have been created in previous web page Query Click on this button to display table Modify Click on this button to submit the modific
209. ld value for near end far end day PM Syntax adsl tca day ne fe es ses uas lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Threshold value Valid values 0 86400 Default value Type Mandatory 5 20 2 adsl tca disable Description Disable TCA Syntax adsi tca disable Parameter None 5 20 3 adsl tca enable Description Enable TCA Syntax adsl tca enable Parameter None 5 20 4 adsl tca interval Description Set threshold value for near end far end interval PM Syntax adsi tca interval ne fe es ses uas lof lol los errframe lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Threshold value Valid values 0 900 Default value Type Mandatory 354 Appendix A ADSL Operational Mask Table Table A 1 ADSL Operational Mask Bit Description Bit Description 0 ANSI_T1 413 32 992 4 AllDigital NonOverlapped 1 ETSI DTS TM06006 33 992 4 AllDigital Overlapped 2 992 1 A Pots NonOverlapped 34 992 3 L Pots NonOverlapped_Mode1 3 992 1 A Pots Overlapped 35 992 3 L Pots NonOverlapped_Mode2 4 992 1 B Isdn_NonOverlapped 36 992 3 L Pots Overlapped_Mode3 5 992 1 B Isdn Overlapped 37 992 3 L Pots Overlapped_Mode4 6 992 1 CG Tcmlsdn_NonOverlapped 38 992 3 M Pots Extend US Overlapped 7 992 1 CG Tcmlsdn_Overlapped 39 992 3 M Pots Extend US NonOverlapped 8 992 2 A Pots NonOverlapped 40 992 5 A Pots NonOverlapped 9 9
210. les in the table Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA ADSL zl Port 1 DI pyca1 sl KEE Destination MAC Type in the Destination MAC address Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table E Ether Type Filtering ADSL y Port 1 y evc 1 y Ether Type Filtering Filtering Type Ether Type y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Next No 3 Incoming EtherType Ox Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Destination IP Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here No From To Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid number value 1 256 Once you have specified the serial number click on this Query s button to display the filter rules Delete Once you have specified the serial number click on this button to delete the filter rules in the table Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA ADSL y Port 1 DI PYC 1 y bridge port Incoming Ether Type Type in the EtherType value hexadecimal Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 114 4 2 4 2 VLAN Priority Remark This option allows you to configure the VLAN priority From the Bridge menu click on Access Control and then VLAN Priority Remark The following page is displayed VLAN Priority Remark PRI R
211. lete a target Modify Select the target number and then click on this button to modify the target setting 167 4 5 3 SNMP Notify This option allows you to setup the SNMP Notification In SNMPv1 asynchronous event reports are called traps while they are called notifications in later versions of SNMP From the SNMP menu click on SNMP Notify The following page is displayed SNMP Notify Next No 3 New Delete Modify Notify well Query Modify Delete SNMP Community Setup Label Description Notify No This field shows the Notify number you select Click on this button to create a new SNMP Notify After you click on New the following page is displayed Type in the name and tag of the SNMP Notify and click on Apply button By specifying the Notify tag you can bind the Notify name to the SNMP target address table When the Notify tag is the same with the Target Tag in a SNMP target table the notification is sent to the corresponding Target address New SNMP Notify Apply Back SnmpNotifyName3 SnmpNotifyTag3 Delete Select a row and then click on this button to delete a Notify Select the row and type in new notify tag and then click on this button to submit the modification Modify 168 4 6 Maintenance 4 6 1 SYS Log Server This option allows you to configure the IP address of the SYS Log server which listens for incoming Syslog messages From th
212. level Description Set PSD level Syntax psdlevel ds us max lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Maximum PSD level tenth dBm Hz Valid values 60 40 downstream step 0 1 60 38 upstream step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 18 psdshape Description Set PSD shape Syntax psdshape ds cut off lt number gt standard Parameter Name Description number Cut off frequencies at carrier Valid values 100 280 step 10 Default value Type Mandatory 352 5 19 19 rxaggregate us max powerlevel Description Set maximum aggregate receive power level Syntax rxaggregate us max powerlevel lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Maximum aggregate receive power level 255 255 tenth dBm Valid values 25 5 25 5 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 20 spectrum name Description Set spectrum profile name Syntax spectrum name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Name of the spectrum profile max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 21 status modify complete Description Set the status of modification Syntax status modify complete Parameter None 353 5 20 TCA Profile Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the TCA Profile execution mode 5 20 1 adsl tca day Description Set thresho
213. lid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 99 rmon statistic lt index gt ifc Description Set Physical interface Syntax rmon statistic lt index gt ifc lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Physical interface index Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 270 5 4 100 rmon statistic lt index gt owner Description Set RMON statistic owner Syntax rmon statistic lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt Owner name Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 101 route Description Add routing to route table Syntax route lt ipv4 address gt netmask lt ipv4 address gt gateway lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 102 route default Description Set default route Syntax route default lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt Default route IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Mandatory
214. line descr line phone customer Parameter None 5 4 25 dsl line identify pppoe srv name Description Set Service Name Syntax dsl line identify pppoe srv name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Set Service name Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 26 dsl line identify pppoe srv name check Description Disable Enable PPPoE Service Name check Syntax dsl line identify pppoe srv name check disable enable Parameter None 247 5 4 27 fdbstatic lt number gt xdsl gigabit Description Static MAC forwarding table setting Syntax fdbstatic lt number gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt mac lt mac address gt deny pass fdbstatic lt number gt gigabit lt port gt la vlan lt VLAN ID gt mac lt mac address gt deny pass Parameter Name Description lt number gt Static MAC forwarding table number Valid values 1 512 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx xx XX XX XX XX xx 00 ff Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 28 fdbstatic lt number gt disable Description Disable specify st
215. lineated Total Cell Count only for Near End HEC ATM Header Error Count IBE Idle Cell Bit Error Count Channel CVs Channel PM Code Violations Channel FECCs Channel PM Forward Error Corrections 203 CLI Command Reference Introduction Access to the Operations System OS Network Element NE system is protected by a logon security system You can log on to the NE with the user name and password After three failed logon attempts the system refuses further attempts After you log on the system monitors the interface for periods of inactivity If the interface is inactive for too long you are automatically logged off All the NEs have the same initial user name admin and password admin You should change the password as soon as possible because the initial password is known to anyone who reads this manual You can also change the user name or add additional user names Use the account add command to enter a new user identification password and authorization level The system can handle one local logon session and at least four remote OS sessions Connect Interface Interface Parameter Console Baud rate 9600 Data bit 8 Parity None Stop bit 1 Telnet Port 23 SSH Port 22 In Windows you can run terminal emulator such as PuTTY Authorization Level Level Description Super user Superuser can run all commands Engineer Engineer can run all commands excep
216. ll the terminal keys and their function List of Terminal Keys TAB Attempt to perform completion on the text before point TAB TAB Display the next keyword of this command Display help of command ENTER Execute input DEL or BACKSPACE Delete the character to the left of the cursor UP Arrow History of last input line DOWN Arrow History of previous input Line Delete the character at point If point is at the beginning of the line CTRL d there are no characters in the line and the last character typed was not bound to delete char then return EOF CTRL a Move to the start of the line CTRL e Move to the end of the line CTRL f Move Forward one character CTRL b Move Back one character CTRL c Force to interrupt CTRL k Kill the text from the current cursor to the end CTRL p Move back through the history list fetching the previous command CTRL n Move forward through the history list fetching the next command CTRL r Search backward starting at the current line and moving up through the history as necessary This is an incremental search Drag the character before the cursor forward over the character at the CTRL cursor moving the cursor forward as well If the insertion point is at the end of the line this transposes the last two characters of the line Negative arguments have no effect CTRL u Kill backward from the cursor to the beginning of
217. llisecond This parameter ranges from 1 to 1024 The second bucket depth is the product of EIR and this parameter Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the rate limit table Query Click on this button to retrieve the entries in the table Delete Click on this button to delete the entries in the table 130 lt gt Rate Limit Policer Binding Table The Rate Limit Policer Binding Table allows you to specify which Policer profile to bind and the binding status for a trunk or line bridge port Rate Limit Policer Binding Table Rate Limit Typel Policer Binding Table y oa y Modify Query a jon d f2 zl fon zl a Eat Rate Limit Policer Binding Setup Label Description Rate Limit Type Click on this drop down list and select the item you want to setup aca y Click on the drop down list to select a line or trunk bridge port Modif Once you have finished setting the parameter values click on this y button to submit the modification Query Click on this button to get most recent data Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify this Select entry l Click on the drop down list and select the Policer profile you want Policer No to bind with this port Binding Status Select to bind ON or unbind OFF the Policer profile 131 lt gt Three Color Marking Policer The IDL 4802 supports TCM Policer in accordance with the Metro Ethernet Forum MEF Bandwidt
218. lows you to query current alarm history alarm and event log From the Maintenance menu click on Fault Management and then Alarm Event The Current Alarm page is displayed Click on the Alarm Event Select drop down list and select Current Alarm History Alarm or Event Log to view Current Alarm Type in the range of rows 1 1024 and then click on the Query button Current Alarm AlarmEvent Select Current Alarm y Row Form H To fio No range from 1 to 1024 ACO Query Current Alarm Table Label Description ACO Click on this button to cut off alarm Query Click on this button to get most recent data Row This field shows the row number ID This field shows the alarm ID Description This field shows the description for the alarm This field shows the alarm level Valid values are Level MJ major alarm MN minor alarm State This field shows the alarm state Set or Clear Sequential Sequential number Time Alarm occurring date and time 182 History Alarm History Alarm Alarm Event Select History Alarm y Query Clear History History Alarm Table Label Description Query Click on this button to query history alarms Clear History Click on this button to clear the alarm history table Row This field shows the row number ID This field shows the alarm ID Description This field shows the description for the alarm This field shows t
219. lt number gt Name Description lt number gt 5 4 33 firmware upgrade Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 34 http port Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 35 igmp acl Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 36 igmp default Description Syntax Parameter Partition number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory Get firmware image from FTP server and write to Flash ROM firmware upgrade lt filename gt Name Description lt filename gt Path and File name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory Set http server listening port http port lt port number gt Name port number Description The port number Valid values Integer range 0 65535 Default value 80 Type Mandatory IGMP ACL control mode igmp acl enable disable None IGMP set default igmp default None 250 5 4 37 igmp deny no router alert Description Enable or disable the function that the system will deny IGMP packets that have no router alert option in their IP header Default is disable the system doesn t care router alert option Syntax gmp deny no router alert enable disable Parameter None 5 4 38 igmp disable Description Disable snooping mode and proxy mode Syntax gmp disable Parameter None 5 4 39 igmp max group limit Description Enable or disable the function that maximum active counter of IGMP groups can be join
220. ms Fiber optics problems ADSLx service problems POTS service is ok POTS service problems ADSLx service is ok Subscriber service problems no POTS and ADSLx service D O a O D Procedure 1 Troubleshoot IDL 4802 Power Up Problems Problem indication e the SYS LED on the front panel is not lit even though the DSLAM is powered up e alarm that indicates a system power up problem e subscribers connected to the DSLAM do not have DSL service POTS service is ok 1 Check that the power switch on the front panel is set to the ON position 2 Check that the power feeds are connected to the DSLAM and that power is present on the two power feeds with correct polarity 3 Replace the IDL 4802 4 Contact your provider Procedure 2 Troubleshoot Fan Card Power Up Problems Problem indication e alarm that indicates a fan problem 1 Check that the fan card is completely inserted in its slot 2 Replace the fan card 3 Contact your provider Procedure 3 Troubleshoot Fiber Optics Problems Problem indication e the GBE1 GBE2 LED on the system front panel is not lit maybe the signal power detected by the fiber optical receiver being below the minimum power threshold but the SFP interface has been activated e alarm that indicates loss of signal e subscribers connected to the DSLAM do not have DSL service POTS service is ok 1 Check the connection of the fiber optics link Check that the connections are secure and that the t
221. n click on Delete button IPoA BRAS MAC lt Paget of 4 Delete wan Query 145 4 2 8 2 Interface Setup This option allows you to setup the interface for IPoA IPoE IWF From the Bridge menu click on POA and then Interface Setup The following page is displayed Click on the radio button to select a circuit set values for the parameters and then click on Modify button IPoA Interface Setup Port 0112 y wet val 43 mamac 4 ol 1001 cvert Pri 0 T Trattic Rx Detautt UnShaped y Tx Defautt LnShaped y Bras Macht y Uplink Giga y Encap LLC Y status Disable y Modify Query IPoA Interface Setup Label Description Port 01 12 y Click on the drop down list and select the line ports to be listed VPI Type in the VPI Value range is 0 255 VCI Type in the VCI Value range is 21 32 65535 MaxMAC Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the bridge port for GBE interface 1 4096 for DSL interface 1 128 Type in the VID value of C Tag the innermost VLAN tag as defined in IEEE CVID 802 1ad and having an EtherType value of 0x8100 The C VID indicates the access loop CVPRI Click on the drop down list and select the VLAN priority level of C Tag Pri 0 7 Click on the drop down lists and select a traffic type for transmit and receive Traffic Rx Tx direction respectively Available options are created in the AT
222. n method LLC or VC Mux Meanwhile the IDL 4802 is also able to automatically sense the following protocol encapsulations PPPoE over ATM per RFC 2684 IPoE over ATM bridge mode and PPP over ATM IPoA works on individual PVC However there are limitations on auto detection of encapsulations 1 LLC VC Mux automatically detection is only applicable to PVC 1 PVC 4 of each ADSL port PVC 5 PVC 8 must be assigned the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method manually 2 PPPoA works only for PVC 1 PVC 4 and the LLC VC Mux automatically detection must be enabled Refer to IPoA configuration 92 4 2 1 3 ADSL Bridge This option allows you to setup the ADSL bridge interface From the Bridge menu click on Interface Setup and then ADSL Bridge The following page is displayed ADSL Bridge wel 1 wuanfuntaoges Silo Elro stock E ingress ON y AccFrml 2 4LL Frame y Isolation ON y Ipriority Force Disabled y ALL TI Modify Port 01 12 sl Pvc sl Query Select Port VID VLAH Ingress Acc Frm Isolation dene Ze 1 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale o 2 il UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale o 3 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale o 4 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale o 5 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale C 6 K 7 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale o 3 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL ON Disbale e 9 1 UnTagged pri 0 No Stack ON ALL O
223. n once you have set new y values for the parameters Select the IGMP version Options are IGMP OFF IGMP V1 IGMP V2 and IGMP Version IGMP V3 IGMP Mode Select the IGMP mode Options are Snooping and Proxy Disable or enable ACL mode IGMP ACL profile will be effective only when IGMP ACL Mode ACL mode is enabled Enabled the system will deny IGMP packets that have no router alert Deny No Alert option in their IP header Disabled default value the system will not care router alert option Enabled the system will limit the maximum active counter of IGMP groups can be joined concurrently for every bridge port Disabled the system will not limit the counter of IGMP groups can be joined for the bridge port The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier By varying this value an administrator may tune the Max Groups Limit Query 1 500 s number of IGMP messages on the network larger values cause IGMP Queries to be sent less often Value range is 1 500 Default is 125 seconds URI 1 500 s The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host s initial report of membership in a group Value range is 1 500 Default 1 138 BC 1 500 s second The Older Host Present Interval It represents how long a host must wait after hearing a Version 1 Query before it may send any IGMPv2 messages Default is 400 sec MRT 1
224. nOverlapped El Carrier Data Mode l la JOFF y FORCE L3 Mode TI Joer y ADSL Line Configuration Label Description ADSL Port From To Type in the line port range Valid number 1 48 Select the Operational Mode s to be masked Select the Operational Mask Mode modes in the block by using mouse and Shift or Ctrl key Select the check box and then click on Modify button Click on this drop down list and select the carrier data mode Select the check box and then click on Modify button OFF Carrier data won t vary during show time ON Carrier data collection is active The carrier data will be refreshed during show time ON INIT The ADSL facility is re initialized and carrier data collection is active will be refreshed Click on this drop down list and select ON to force the ADSL Carrier Data Mode FORCE L3 Mode port to enter power management L3 mode Idle state Select the check box and then click on Modify button Modify Click on this button to submit modification Query Click on this button to display current line configuration 162 4 3 3 2 Line Information This option allows you to setup the ADSL line information From the ADSL menu click on Line Config amp Info and then Line Information The following page is displayed ADSL Line Information ADSL Port from 1 To 5 ADSL 1 886 32826433 Mak Office ADSL Line Information
225. nd select a descriptor type After you select a descriptor type the corresponding parameters which are configurable will be displayed on the top Valid descriptor types are Unshaped atmNoTrafficDescriptor This identifies no ATM traffic descriptor type This traffic descriptor type can be used for best effort traffic Policed CBR atmCLPTransparentNoScr Shaped CBR atmCLPTransparentNoScr This traffic descriptor type is for the CLP transparent model and no Descriptor Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the CBR 1 conformance definition Connections specifying this traffic descriptor type will be rejected at UNI 3 0 or UNI 3 1 interfaces For a similar traffic descriptor type that can be accepted at UNI 3 0 and UNI 3 1 interfaces see atmNoClpNoScr Policed VBR1 atmNoCLPScrCdvt TYPE This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT This traffic descriptor type is applicable to VBR connections following the UNI 3 0 3 1 conformance definition for PCR CLP 0 1 and SCR CLP 0 1 These VBR connections differ from VBR 1 164 connections in that the CLR objective applies only to the CLP 0 cell flow Policed VBR2 atmCLPNoTaggingScrCdvt Shaped VBRNRT atmCLPNoTaggingScrCdvt This traffic descriptor type is for CLP with Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT and no tagging This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connection
226. ndard Time jt cct hst Time waadt Time wst jst kst cast GMT 05 00 GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 GMT 03 30 Central Daylight Time Atlantic Standard Time Eastan Daylight Time Newfoundland Standard YS GMT 03 00 Altantic Daylight Time GMT 03 00 Brazil Standard Time GMT 03 00 Greenland Standard Time GMT 02 00 Azores Time GMT 01 00 West Africa Time GMT Greenwich Mean Time GMT 00 00 Western European Time GMT 00 00 Universal Time GMT 00 00 Universal Time GMT 01 00 Central European Time GMT 01 00 Middle European Time GMT 01 00 Middle Eruopean Winter Ga Sa Sa GMT 01 00 Swedish Winter Time GMT 01 00 French Winter Time GMT 02 00 Eastean European Time GMT 02 00 Middle European GMT 02 00 French Summer Time GMT 02 00 Egypt Standard Time GMT 03 00 Egypt Daylight Time GMT 03 00 Baghdad Time GMT 03 30 Iran Time GMT 04 00 GMT Plus 4 Hours GMT 05 00 GMT Plus 5 Hours GMT 05 30 Indian Standard Time GMT 06 00 GMT Plus 6 Hours GMT 07 00 South Smatra Time GMT 07 00 West Australian Nr ON GMT 07 30 Java Time GMT 08 00 China Coast Time GMT 08 00 Hongkong Standard GMT 08 00 West Australian Daylight GMT 08 00 WST GMT 09 00 Japan Standard Time GMT 09 00 Korean Standard Time GMT 09 30 Central Australian 282 Standard Time sast GMT 09 30 South Australian Standard Time jdt GMT 10 00 JDT gst GMT 10 00 Guam Sta
227. ndard Time east GMT 10 00 East Australian Standard Time cadt GMT 10 30 Central Austrlian Daylight Time sadt GMT 10 30 South Australian Daylight Time eadt GMT 11 00 East Australian Daylight Time nzt GMT 12 00 New Zealand Time nzst GMT 12 00 New Zealand Standard Time idle GMT 12 00 International Date Line East nzadt GMT 13 00 New Zealand Daylight Time 5 4 136 trunk mode Description Set Trunk mode to Non Link Aggregation or Link Aggregation with LACP Syntax trunk mode general lacp Parameter None 5 4 137 vlan ethertype s tag Description Set VLAN S Tag Ether Type value Syntax vlan ethertype s tag lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt S Tag Ether type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value 0x8100 Type Mandatory 283 5 4 138 vlan protocol base Description Set Protocol Based VLAN table Delete the specified entry from Protocol Based VLAN table Syntax vlan protocol base lt index gt ethertype lt number gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Parameter Name Description lt index gt Protocol Based VLAN table index Valid values 1 32 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Ether type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 284 5 4 139 vlan translation lt port gt l
228. nds to login for the first time he will be asked to change his password see the figure below and then login with the new password Hi testi Please Change your password Old Password Je New Password p SUBMIT 85 4 1 12 Duplicator This option allows you to duplicate all partial the configurations of one selected line port as a template to other ports as many as you want From the System menu click on Duplicator The following page is displayed Select the types of configurations ADSL line configuration ADSL profiles or you want to duplicate first Then specify the port number as the template the source port to be copied and select the target ports to which the template is going to be copied At last click on Paste to apply System Duplicator Templated ADSL Port 1 Foste To be duplicated ADSL Port mr oh 0 al 15f wf 281 oo 8 al 39 auf Iv Vv Vv E E RS B Bj Bj mj Note Except the top three functions every function must be selected with the PVC VLAN Bridge function selected or the configuration cannot be duplicated to other ports 86 4 2 Bridge 4 2 1 Inte rface Setup 4 2 1 1 GIGA Bridge This option allows you to setup the GBE trunk bridge interfaces From the Bridge menu click on Interface Setup and then GIGA Bridge The following page is displayed GIGA Bridge Mode Uplink hp 1 Mamac 1024 yLanfPri o UnTaaged no Stack y ingress ON
229. ne 243 5 4 10 atm loopback Description Syntax Parameter ATM loopback testing OAM Cell Generation enable OAM Cell Generation disable Set ATM loopback type or clear loopback status for a PVC atm loopback enable atm loopback disable atm looback lt port gt lt pvc gt type lt type gt clear Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt type gt ATM loopback type Valid values f5 e2e f5 segment Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 11 cli config session Description Syntax Parameter Set CLI max number of connection sessions cli config session lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Set CLI max number of connection sessions Valid values 1 10 Default value 5 Type Mandatory 5 4 12 cli config timeout Description Syntax Parameter Set CLI configuration timeout value cli config timeout lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Set CLI connection timeout value Valid values 180 3600 sec Default value 300 sec Type Mandatory 244 5 4 13 cluster cfg domain Description Set cluster domain name Syntax cluster cfg domain lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Cluster domain name Valid values max length 31 Default value Type Manda
230. ne mode mask Description Syntax Parameter Set force to power management L3 mode or not line mode force 13 on off None Set Clear xDSL line Operational mode mask line mode mask set clear lt opmode ID gt Name Description lt opmode id gt The ID of allowed ADSL modes of operation Valid values Use list oo mode command to see all the operation modes Default value Type Mandatory 308 5 10 5 line port Description Syntax Parameter 5 10 6 line profile Description Syntax Parameter Set xDSL line port information line port id lt id gt description lt desc gt phone lt phone number gt Name Description lt id gt Line ID name max 32 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt desc gt Line port description max 48 character Default value Type Mandatory lt phone number gt Phone number max 32 characters Valid values no limit format Default value Type Mandatory Create xDSL line profile line profile service spectrum tca lt number gt Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 120 1 64 for tca profile Default value Type Mandatory 5 10 7 line status service Description Syntax Parameter Set xDSL line service status Service ON OFF RESET line status service on off reset None 309 5 11 IPoA Configure Mode Commands The commands
231. ntry Disable Ether Type priority list entry Syntax ethertype lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la type lt ethertype gt ethertype lt number gt list ethertype lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt ethertype gt Ether Type value Valid values 0x0001 Oxffff Default value Type Mandatory 334 5 14 8 ethertype list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 9 ipprotocol Description Syntax Parameter Show Ether Type priority list ethertype list None Specify IP protocol of packets to remark vlan priority Show IP protocol priority list entry Disable IP protocol priority list entry ipprotocol lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la protocol lt protocol gt ipprotocol lt number gt list ipprotocol lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt ToS IP Precedence priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory
232. ofile service adel AEN 234 show profile spectrum AGS lisina 234 show profile tca siii eee eege 235 SNOW rmon alarm cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 235 show rmon ether bstong ee 235 Show FIORESE Aide secede ca e den eege ek Aere 235 show IMONMISION cas nee ny een ne a neuen seca 236 Show rmon Be WEE 236 show rmon EE 236 ShoWrolle austin 236 SHOW TUNMINQCG sici n data 236 show runningcfg interface del 237 show runningcfg interface oigabtt eeen 237 STOW Lut rara 237 SHOW SID E 237 SHOWS EE 237 SNOW syslog Server coooccconccccccccccncccconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannn ccoo 237 SHOW SYSTEMI ss scars Ce ase as ee eg ah as ce ac Sted cease eee 238 o E EARE Ra 238 5 4 5 3 117 Show tem policer iii 238 5 3 118 show temperature EEN 238 5 3 119 SHOW TIME E 238 5 3 120 SEENEN 238 5 3 121 SNOW VERSION cone 238 5 3 122 Show version Ke EE 238 5 3 123 STOW VAM DEE 239 5 3 124 Ac 239 5 3 125 show vlan proiocol base ooooooccccccccccconoconoccccnonoccnnnnnnana nono 239 5 3 126 show vlan translation one to one oooocccccccccccccccccnanananannnons 239 59 127 show vlan translation Many t0 0N8 ooococcccccccccccccnanananannnoos 239 5 3 128 A a E Ea 239 5 3 129 a EENEG 240 Configure Mode COMMANGG cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeennees 241 5 4 1 le TE E 241 5 4 2 account add actos teat cata stag AAO aot eS ee Rte h td 241 5 4 3 account deleie EEN 242 5 4 4 account Modify EE 242 5 4 5 el L
233. on 180 4 6 4 ATM Loopbacks This option allows you to modify the ATM F4 F5 entries or send the diagnostic entry From the Maintenance menu click on ATM Loopbacks The following page is displayed ATM Loopback OAM Cell Generation Disabled Enabled Apply Port 0112 y Pvc 1 y Create Query Delete frsez d select d setect y select y select y select d CRW IN A Si ATM Loopbacks Setup Label Description Click on the radio button to Disable Enable OAM Cell Generation Then click on Apply button to submit the setting Port 01 12 y evc 1 y Click on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC 1 8 Click on this button to create a loopback setting OAM Cell Generation Create Note make sure the interface has been setup and the service state of the circuit is turned on Query Click on this button to query the loopback status Delete Click on this button to delete a loopback entry Click on the checkbox to select the PVC you want to create or SE delete the loopback setting for Port This field shows the line port and PVC number LoopBack ID Type in a loopback ID 32 digit Test Type Select the loopback type F5 E2E or F5 Segment This field shows current loopback testing status Possible values Status are Fail Success In Progress or 181 4 6 5 Fault Management 4 6 5 1 Alarm Event This option al
234. on Select the range of entry number in the FDB to be retrieved Valid No From To b number value 1 512 Query Click on this button to display the static MAC forwarding entries Delete Delete the entries according to the entry number range you type in eca zl eca y Click on these drop down list to select a bridge port ADSL bridge port or a al GIGA bridge port where the static forwarding entries to be configured Source MAC Type in the MAC address for the static entry VID Type in the VID for the static entry 1 4094 Click on the drop down list and select Deny or Pass Pass means to forward the packets with destination MAC address Process matching one of the static forwarding MAC addresses to a specified output bridge port Deny means to drop the packets Create Click on this button to create a new entry 135 4 2 6 Relay 4 2 6 1 DSL Line Identify This option allows you to configure the DHCP option 82 and PPPoE relay function From the Bridge menu click on Relay and then DSL Line Identify The following page is displayed E m m m m u m m m Dhcp Model Relay OFF ID Select Circuit ID e Circuit ID Type DEFAULT y Remote ID Type DEFAULT y DSL Line Identify PPP Service Name Check Disabled e IPDSLAM DSLAM Name mode Customer y DSL Line ID Configuration Port 01 12 pvc 1 y Query Modify IPDSLAM 001 000 00035 IPDSLAM 001 1 FALSE sl IPDSLAM 002 0
235. opwr_fe Far end Loss of Power 619 alm_adsl_commf_fe Far end Communication Failure 620 alm_adsl_nopeer_fe Far end No Peer Present 622 alm_adsl_lcd fe Far end Loss Cell Delineation 624 alm_adsl_ncd fe Far end No Cell Delineation Appendix C Maintenance Requirement Tools and Equipment Requirements Below tablelists required tools and test equipment for the IDL 4802 system maintenance Required Installation Tools and Materials Item Required Purpose Anti static wrist strap Protect the system from electrostatic discharge damage Hand tool Screwdrivers for equipment removal and replacement Wire cutter stripper Prepare wires for electrical connections Wire wrap gun and bit Removing and replacing the system interconnection wires Wires System interconnections to external facilities VF transmission and signaling test sets Testing faulty POTS Fuse and alarm panel For protection and simplifying troubleshooting System Spares Always keep spares for the DSLAM at each central office for replacement purposes During the system trouble shooting procedures certain cards at the central office and or remote site will be required to be replaced Dispatching Maintenance Persionnel Some procedures in this manual involve end to end system testing for which technicians are needed at each remote site The remote IDL 4802 system sites are normally unattended however technicians should be dis
236. ort Service EE 72 4 1 4 ADSL ege e 73 A 75 O SA A E A A ER TO 76 4 1 7 System Inventory aaa 80 4 1 8 System Copntact ING WEE 81 ALN SSI EE 82 e E lie 83 AAA ele TE Mall OM EE 84 RT e E 86 CA e D 87 4 2 1 Interface A da 87 4 2 2 VLAN Configuration DEE 96 ARS AMO RE 104 os ee ee A Ee Nee Se eee Ae A tee 108 4 2 5 PO PWANOMING eieiei A 134 4 216 GAY ii ica 136 A A A Te Parnr There e 138 Ee 147 Cen Mee TE 147 4 3 2 Data amp Inventory E 155 4 3 3 Line Config amp Info A 62 AA AA T AE Aa A ee 164 4 4 1 ATM Traffic Descriptor AEN 164 RE TE 166 4 5 1 SNMP Community EE 166 45 2 SNMP Tagal dE 167 45S SNMP NOUV EE 168 4 6 Maintenance zeen Seege Canara N E CaA ai i n 169 AON Ee 169 BEI 170 4 6 3 Firmware le E 178 4 6 4 ATM Loopbacks AAA 181 4 6 5 Fault Management 182 4 6 6 Performance Monitoring ccccccccnccccccnnccccononanananoncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 187 CLI Command Reference siheissssuseddcupdivninvabivadsoctiusbsnabivabinsdsusbsaphivabsusbsvabsupisvabensbivabeads 204 5 1 Global COM MANOS asar ai 209 5 1 1 EE E 209 5 1 2 CU rra 209 5 1 3 OS 209 5 1 4 ele 209 5 1 5 EE 209 5 1 6 Ee 209 5 1 7 We SE 210 5 1 8 IG 210 5 1 9 ISO PMI Sa aaa a Ata eA ae 210 5 1 10 ENEE 210 5 1 11 system location EE 210 5 1 12 SYSIOM NAMO E 211 5 1 13 system OSEAN APPO APO A 211 5 2 Initialize Mode COMMANAG ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 212 5 2 1 AN E E AA ARA RANAS 212 5 2 2 leen casas candados
237. ount account add lt name gt account add lt name gt password lt password gt comment lt comment gt account add lt name gt password lt password gt level lt level gt comment lt comment gt account add lt name gt password lt password gt password expiration lt day number gt Name Description lt name gt ID name max 31 characters Only 0 9 a z A Z and symbol _ are accepted for account name For example abc_12 XYZ 10 1 is a valid user name Note that the IDL 4802 does not accept user names beginning with a digital number For example 123abc or 123456 are not a valid name Default value Type Mandatory lt password gt Input password max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional lt level gt Set access level Valid values superuser engineer guest Default value guest Type Optional lt comment gt Set comment max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional lt day number gt Set password expiration days 0 disable Default value Type Optional 241 5 4 3 account delete Description Delete account Syntax account delete lt name gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt ID name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 4 account modify Description Modify account Syntax account modify lt name gt comment lt comment gt account modif
238. p Inventory 4 3 2 1 Inventory This option allows you to view the inventory of the ATUC and ATUR From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then Inventory The following page is displayed ADSL Inventory Port 01 12 y Atuxc ATUC y Query Circuit Setup System Inventory J ADSL Inventory Label Description Port 01 12 y Click on this drop down list and select the ports to be displayed Atux Select ATUC or ATUR inventory to be displayed To view inventory click on this button once you have selected the Guay port and ATUx 155 4 3 2 2 Loop Test This option allows you to do the ADSL Dual End Loop Test From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then Loop Test The following page is displayed ADSL Dual End Loop Test Port 1 y Diagnostics Run Diagnostics Abort 3 Residential n mm mm ee mm mm e mm mm mmm DIAGNOSTICS Completed Click on the drop down list and select the line port you want to test Then click on Diagnostics Run to start a DELT If you want to discontinue the test or make the loop go back to the normal state when the test has finished just click on Diagnostics Abort Test in progress Click on Diagnostics Run and then the following page is displayed ADSL Dual End Loop Test Port 1 zj Diagnostics Run Diagnostics Abort LOOP DIAGNOSTICS INIT 156 Test completed When the test has complete
239. patched when needed The IDL 4802 system maintenance efforts and monitor the system for alarms during those on site operations 357 Electrostatic Discharge Protection The IDL 4802 system contains static sensitive components Be sure to wear a properly grounded antistatic wrist strap when handling them Also when removing and replacing a card hold it either by its front ejector handle or by its edges Do not touch its rear connector contacts which must remain free of contaminants Routine Maintenance Always monitor the IDL 4802 system performance at the central office remote sites using the snmp It allows user to view the current system status alarm information and to take the necessary corrective action if a problem is reported Also keep each IDL 4802 system site free of dust and other pollutant that could affect system performance In addition be sure to maintain the environment conditions at the central office and at each remote system site The ideal operating temperature is about 20 c The following is the acceptable operating condition range a 10C to 65 C and 0 to 95 humidity at 35 C Powering the IDL 4802 Up or Down This section describes how to power up the DSLAM and how to power down the DSLAM Procedures of Powering Up the DSLAM Step Action 1 Put on the antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounding point d Ensure that the DSLAM is securely installed Ensure that the DSLAM ground strap is connecte
240. perational state shows Expire ON this indicates that the Actor s Receive machine is in the EXPIRED state if Expire OFF this indicates that the Actor s Receive machine is not in the EXPIRED state LACP Key The current administrative operational value of the Key for the Aggregation Port This is a value between 0000 FFFF The meaning of particular Key values is of local significance System ID A 6 octet MAC address value that defines the value of the System ID for the System that contains this Aggregation Port System Priority A value that indicates the priority value associated with the Actor s Partner s System ID Value range is 0 65535 Port The port number associated with this link assigned to the port by the Actor Partner Port number range is 0 65535 Port Priority The current value of the port priority for the protocol Actor Partner Value range is 0 65535 90 4 2 1 2 ADSL PVC This option allows you to setup the ADSL PVC From the Bridge menu click on nterface Setup and then ADSL PVC The following page is displayed ADSL PVC Setup vet 0 val 35 Tratfic Rx Default UnShaped zl Tx Default UnShaped y Encap LLC Z Protocol Base VLAN Disabled zl ALL I Create Modify Delete evc E CR WE WK SE WK WE WK ATM TRAFFIC PARAMETER You shall click on the drop down lists to select port range and PVC first Then the data of these PV
241. port Then click on Put File button Database Configuration DB Config Select C Export File Put Running Config To Remote TFTP Server v TFTP Server p 172 16 10 241 File Name configl Put Fle TFTP put file successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select CjExport File Put Running Contig To Remote TFTP Server D TFTP Server p 172 16 10241 File Name config Put File TFTP put file fail Database Configuration DB Config Select C Export File Put Running Config To Remote TFTP Server y TFTP Server p 172 16 1028 File Name config Put File 173 D Save Running Config to Flash System Config Click on the drop down list and select partition and then click on Write_Running button to write running configuration to Flash Database Configuration DB Config Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config 3 gt irite flash at Partition Wirte_Running Write running config to Flash successfully Database Configuration DB Config Select D Save Running Config to Flash System Config y ite flash at Partition2 DI Wirte_Running 174 E Reload Flash to Running Config Click on the drop down list and select partition and then click on LOAD_FLASH button to load configuration from Flash to Running Config Database Configuration DB Contig Select BiReload FLASH System Config to Running Contig y Load flash at Pattition2 DI LOAD_FLA
242. r 5 14 3 dstip Description Syntax Parameter af23 Assured Forwarding Class 2 High Drop bits 010110 af31 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Low Drop bits 011010 af32 Assured Forwarding Class 3 Medium Drop bits 011100 af33 Assured Forwarding Class 3 High Drop bits 011110 af41 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Low Drop bits 100010 af42 Assured Forwarding Class 4 Medium Drop bits 100100 af43 Assured Forwarding Class 4 High Drop bits 100110 ef Expedited Forwarding bits 101110 Show Differentiated Service priority list ds list None Specify dest IP address of packets to remark vlan priority Show dest IP address priority list entry Disable dest IP address priority list entry dstip lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la ip lt ipv4 address gt lt netmask gt dstip lt number gt list dstip lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Destination IP address priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 332 5 14 4 dstip list Description Syntax Parameter 5 14 5 dstmac Description Syntax Parameter Default
243. r Level Allowed PWR ASES ee e E e e Emb e ADSL2 ReADSL ADSL2 Spectrum Profile Label Description Select Index Click on the drop down list to select the range of profile index Options are 1 4 5 8 117 120 Index This field shows the profile index Modem Features Select ADSL2 ReADSL2 ADSL2 and Enable Disable special modem functions for better performance Direction DS downstream US upstream Aggregate Power Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power 0 25 5dB PSD Level Maximum PSD level Valid values are ADSL2 60 40 dB Hz DS 60 38 dB Hz US ReADSL2 60 37 dB Hz DS 60 32 9 dB Hz US ADSL2 60 40 dB Hz DS 60 38 dB Hz US PSD Shape Only for ADSL2 Valid options are Standard CA100 CA110 CA120 CA130 CA140 CA150 CA160CA170 CA180 CA190 CA200 CA210 CA220 CA230 CA240 CA250 CA260 CA270 CA280 PBO Power backoff operation mode OFF ON Max Rx Aggr Allowed PWR Maximum aggregate receive power over a set of subcarriers It ranges from 25 5 to 25 5 dBm with 0 1 dB steps 153 4 3 1 5 TCA Profile This option allows you to setup the PM counter threshold for TCA threshold crossing alert From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then TCA Profile The following page is displayed ADSL TCA Profile la Page1 of 16 y Modify Delete The First Index is default profile can t modify amp del
244. r end counter associated with the number of corrected code words encountered by the channel The IDL 4802 provides the following ADSL PM thresholds NE threshold FE threshold 15min ES threshold 15min ES threshold 15min SES threshold 15min SES threshold 15min UAS threshold 15min UAS threshold 15min LOS threshold 15min LOS threshold 15min LOF threshold Not support Not support 15min LOPWR threshold 15min LOL threshold Not support 15min ErrFrm threshold 15min ErrFrm threshold 24hour ES threshold 24hour ES threshold 24hour SES threshold 24hour SES threshold 24hour UAS threshold 24hour UAS threshold 58 3 3 1 RMON Feature The IDL 4802 supports performance statistics defined in RMON MIB groups 1 Ethernet statistics 2 history control 3 alarm and 9 event per RFC 2819 for all network uplink 10 100 1000 ports The supported parameters are as follows RMON ETH Statistics variables Variable Description DropEvents Monitoring rx dropped packets Octets Monitoring rx bytes packets Pkts Monitoring rx packets BroadcastPkts Monitoring rx broadcast packets MulticastPkts Monitoring rx multicast packets CRCAlignErrors Monitoring rx error alignment packets UndersizePkts Monitoring rx undersize packets OversizePkts Monitoring rx oversize packets Fragments Monitoring r
245. r in the Cluster Information table and click on Apply When switching to that NE successfully you can see the name of that NE displayed on the left top of the page You are controlling that NE now If you click on the Local radio button and click on Apply you ll switch back to the NE you re directly connected to Cluster Name NE2 Act ClusterID 102 Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query NE2 default Slave Only Cluster Infomation Apply Every time you modify the setting for example changing the Role of any cluster member the cluster will be reconstructed cluster state Discovering gt Voting gt Master or Slave If you modify the Role to Individual Cluster State will show IDLE The DSLAM is notin a cluster now If you are directly connecting to a Slave in the cluster connecting via its in band out band IP address you cannot switch to any other member in the cluster When you select other member in the table and click on Apply an error message is displayed on screen 4 1 7 System Inventory This option allows you to retrieve the system inventory including Description of the System HW FW SW Version Model Information Part Number Hardware Revision and Serial Number From the System menu click on System Inventory Click on the Query button The following page is displayed System Inventory 80 4 1 8 System Contact Info This option allows you to specify the system n
246. racies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense FCC Caution To assure continued compliance example use only shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subjec
247. rameter None 295 5 7 18 pvc atmdesc plc Description Set ATM police Rx descriptor Syntax pvc atmdesc plc lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 19 pvc atmdesc shp Description Set ATM shaped Tx descriptor Syntax pvc atmdesc shp lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 20 pvc encapsulation Description Set Encapsulation type Syntax pvc encapsulation llc vemux auto Parameter None Note The IDL 4802 supports auto detection of the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method LLC or VC Mux Meanwhile the IDL 4802 is also able to automatically sense the following protocol encapsulations PPPoE over ATM per RFC 2684 IPoE over ATM bridge mode and PPP over ATM IPoA works on individual PVC However there are limitations on auto detection of encapsulations 3 LLC VC Mux automatically detection is only applicable to PVC 1 PVC 4 of each ADSL port PVC 5 PVC 8 must be assigned the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method manually 4 PPPoA works only for PVC 1 PVC 4 Refer to IPoA configuration commands 296 5 7 21 stack Description Enable disable VLAN stacking Syn
248. rameter None 5 4 52 management dhcp timeout Description Set DHCP client timeout value Syntax management dhcp timeout lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt DHCP timeout Valid values 0 4294967295 sec Default value 60 Type Mandatory 254 5 4 53 management dhcp leasetime Description Set DHCP client lease time value Syntax management dhcp leasetime lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt DHCP leasetime Valid values 0 4294967295 sec Default value 4294967295 Type Mandatory 5 4 54 management gbe Description Set GBE port IP address Syntax management gbe lt ipv4 adderss gt netmask lt netmask gt Parameter Name Description ipv4 address IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory netmask Netmask of the management port Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional 5 4 55 management gbe vian Description Set incoming VLAN tag management only allowing incoming packets with the specified VLAN ID or no limit of VLAN ID Syntax management gbe vlan lt VLAN ID gt no limit lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 255 5 4 56 management gbe vlan priority Description Set priority level of the inband management
249. ransmit and receive connections are not reversed 2 Disconnect the fiber optics link from the dual fiber optics connector and do a physical loopback at the IDL 4802 a If the GBE1 GBE2 LED turns green the problem is with the fiber optics link b If the GBE1 GBE2 LED does not turn green the problem is with the DSLAM Follow Procedure 1 to troubleshoot the DSLAM 3 If the problem is with the fiber optics cabling clean or replace as appropriate 4 Contact your provider 362 Procedure 4 Troubleshoot ADSLx Service Problems Problem indication No ADSLx service to the affected subscribers POTS service is ok 1 If all subscribers connected to the DSLAM are affected and the SYS LED on the front panel is not lit check the power switch on the front panel e if the power switch is set to the OFF position power up the DSLAM by sliding the power switch to the ON position e if the power switch is set to the ON position follow Procedure 1 to troubleshoot the DSLAM for power up problem 2 If all subscribers are affected check the SYS LED on the front panel if it is red replace the DSLAM 3 Check the GBE1 GBE2 LED if SFP interface is activated if it is not lit follow Procedure 3 to troubleshoot the DSLAM for fiber optics problems 4 lf only some subscribers are affected identify the ports that have problems Check that the subscribers are connected to the line interfaces properly 5 Contact your provider Procedure 5 Troubleshoot POTS Servi
250. red to be Individual i e this link can be operated only as an individual link Aggr 89 Sync If the operational state shows Sync ON the system considers this link to be IN_SYNC l e it has been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted If Sync OFF then this link is currently OUT_OF_SYNC i e it is not in the right Aggregation Collect If the operational state shows Collect ON this means collection of incoming frames on this link is definitely enabled i e collection is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Distribute If the operational state shows Distribute OFF this means distribution of outgoing frames on this link is definitely disabled i e distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information Default If the operational state shows Default ON this indicates that the Actor s Receive machine is using Defaulted operational Partner information administratively configured for the Partner If Default OFF the operational Partner information in use has been received in a LACPDU Expire If the o
251. ress for which the SNTP client can synchronize its time Modify Click on this button to submit the modification 82 4 1 10 IP Routes This option allows you to configure the IP route table for the in band and out band management traffic From the System menu click on P Routes The following page is displayed Click on the drop down list to select the page to be displayed first IP Routes System Da EN 1 254 Set NextNo 5 Hext gt 0 ADD Next Destination Het Mask Gateway 0 0 0 JN 0 0 0 0 J O 0 o o Page 1 of 2 y Delete IP Route Setup Label Description System Gateway This field shows current system default gateway You can modify the gateway address by typing in new value and then click on Set If the DSLAM is a Slave in a cluster this field shows the in band IP address of the Master if the DSLAM is a Master in a cluster this field shows the IP address of the Cluster gateway ADD Next Click on this button to add a new IP route Destination Type in the destination IP address for the new IP route Net Mask Type in the subnet mask for the new IP route Gateway Type in the IP address of the gateway for the new IP route Delete Select Click on the radio button to select a route and then click on Delete to remove this route from the table 83 4 1 11 User Administration This option allows you to administer accoun
252. riority Priority Out on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 116 lt gt IP Source VLAN IP Source Priority Remark PRI Remark IP Source y No From 1 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL y Port 1 y evc 1 y Next No 2 Source o P P P maskfo o fo fo Priortycoup 0 zl Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN J VLAN Priority Remark Setup IP Source Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value No From To range is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this Query button to retrieve To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on Delete this button to delete ans d Poni alpea sl Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge port Source IP Type in the IP address of the coming source MASK Type in the subnet mask i li h ing VLAN priori Priority Out SC on the drop down list and select the outgoing priority 0 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table SA lt gt IP Destination eca y oa y Next No 2 VLAN IP Destination Priority Remark PRI Remark 3 IP Destination y No From 1 To No range from
253. rol List With the advanced QoS features the IDL 4802 is an ideal solution for next generation broadband network to deliver rich video contents DSL POTS and VoIP service over ADSL2 connection 1 1 Product Features 48 Port ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 Subscriber Interface with Built in POTS Splitter DMT data rate Downstream up to 25 Mbps Upstream up to 3Mbps 2 x 1000Base T or 2 x mini GbE Uplink Interfaces Web based GUI Management Local RS 232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP Telnet SSH Management Firmware Upgradeable via FTP Configuration Backup and Restoration via TFTP Supports IPSec L2TP PPTP VPN Pass through Supports 4K MAC address Supports IEEE 802 1q Tag based VLAN and Protocol based VLAN Layer 2 3 Filtering Based on MAC IP Protocol Port Number and Ether Type Access Control List by MAC IP Protocol Port number Traffic prioritization 802 1p Supports IGMP Snooping Proxy per IGMP v1 v2 and v3 FAN Alarm Indicating Temperature Monitoring and System Overheating Trap Functionality Supports IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation 9 AAA 1 2 Package Contents IDL 4802 IDL 4802 Unit x 1 AC Power Cord x 1 CD x 1 Quick Installation Guide x 1 2 Meter Telco 50 Cable x 4 Console Cable x 1 Rack mounting Ear x 2 Screw Package x 2 Connect Tenon x 4 RJ 45 Cable for Fan x 1 IDL 4802 48 IDL 4802 48Unit x 1 DC Power Terminal Block x 1 CD x 1 Quick Installation Guide x 1 2 Meter
254. rotocol Base VLAN Disabled auf s wel Delete action buttons SCT Query Select Port Rx Traffic Tx Traffic ENCAP Protocol Base VLAN Default Default LLC Disabled Default Default LEG Disabled Default Default LEG Disabled Default Default LLC Disabled e e e Ze Default Default Disabled Default Default Disabled E OW WI Default Default Disabled Y Default Default Disabled CA TM TRAFFIC PARAMETER Click on the hyperlinks below on each configuration page will lead you to the related page s directly without the need to search in the menu tree The Index Selecting area is usually for selecting the range of interface s to be configured In this case the filters such as link type circuit number PVC number or bridge port index will enable the operator to easily locate the target interface s that he would like to provision The Confi guration area is for setting the parameter value of the entries in the table This area shows the data of selected entry in Data Table to allow operator to modify the parameter values The Data Table is for listing the setting of each interface bridge port Often there is a radio button for each port By clicking on the radio button you can specify which entry to be created modified or deleted For the above example first you must select the link type circuit number range and PVC to identify the range of
255. ry lt VLAN ID gt IP Allowed entry VLAN ID number Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Optional 5 12 10 ip allowed list Description Display static IP allow access list Syntax ip allowed list Parameter None 317 5 12 11 ipprotocol Description Specify IP Protocol of packets to reject Show specify IP protocol access list entry Delete specify IP protocol deny access list entry Syntax ipprotocol lt number gt deny xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la protocol lt protocol gt ipprotocol lt number gt list ipprotocol lt number gt disable Parameter Name Description lt number gt IP Protocol deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory protocol Input protocol name Valid values icmp ICMP Internet Control Message lt 1 gt igmp IGMP Internet Group Management lt 2 gt ipinip IP in IP encapsulation lt 4 gt tcp TCP Transmission Control lt 6 gt grp GRP Globin Reduction Protocol lt 7 gt igp IGP Any private interior gateway lt 9 gt udp UDP User Datagram lt 17 gt gre GRE General Routing Encapsulation lt 47 gt eigrp EIGRP lt 88 gt ospf OSPF lt 89 gt Default value
256. s 0 65535 Default value 32768 Type Mandatory 5 4 123 stp version Description Set version to STP or RSTP Syntax stp version STP RSTP Parameter None 277 5 4 124 syslog server Description Set system log server Syntax syslog server lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt Syslog server IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory 5 4 125 tcm color aware Description Set Color Aware or Color Blind TCM Policer Syntax tcm color aware aware blind Parameter None 5 4 126 tcm color field Description Set TCM color field to be VLAN priority or DSCP Syntax tcm color field vprio dscp Parameter None 5 4 127 tcm green Description Set TCM green color value Syntax tcm green lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt TCM green color value 0 63 for DSCP color field Default value 1 Type Mandatory Valid values 0 7 for VLAN priority color field 5 4 128 tcm non conform pkt Description Set the action for non conforming packets discard or tag If Tag is selected then all the packets will be marked as green yellow or red in the Color field Syntax tcm non conform pkt discard tag Parameter None 278 5 4 129 tcm red Description Syntax Parameter 5 4 130 tcm yellow Description Syntax Parameter Set TCM red color value tem r
257. s 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 95 rmon history lt index gt ifc Description Set Physical interface Syntax rmon history lt index gt ifc lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Physical interface index Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 96 rmon history lt index gt interval Description Set RMON history interval Syntax rmon history lt index gt interval lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt History interval Valid values 1 3600 sec Default value Type Mandatory 269 5 4 97 rmon history lt index gt owner Description Set RMON history owner Syntax rmon history lt index gt owner lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON history control entry index Valid values 1 10 Default value Type Mandatory lt string gt Owner name Valid values string type value max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 98 rmon statistic lt index gt delete Description Delete RMON statistic entry Syntax rmon statistic lt index gt delete Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON statistic entry index Va
258. s displayed ATM Statistics ADSL Port 1 y Show Tx Cells D Query Auto Update I Query ATM Statistics Label Description ADSL Port Click on this button to select line port 1 48 Auto Update Click on this checkbox to auto update the displayed statistics Sh Click on this drop down list to select Tx Rx or All Tx amp Rx OW data Query Click on this button to query current statistics 190 4 6 6 4 RMON This option allows you to configure and query the RMON Statistics The IDL 4802 supports performance statistics defined in RMON MIB groups 1 Ethernet statistics 2 history control 3 alarm and 9 event per RFC 2819 for all network uplink ports From the Maintenance menu click on Performance Monitoring and then RMON The following page is displayed Select type of RMON table in the drop down list Remote Monitoring Select Typel Select 191 lt gt ETH Statistics This option is for displaying the Ethernet interface RMON data Click on the Data Source drop down list and select GBE1 or GBE2 Type in an owner name and then click on New button to create a new ETH statistics entry An owner is the entity that configured this entry and is therefore using the resources assigned to it Remote Monitoring ETH Statistics Select Type ETH Statistics y NextNo 3 Data Source GBE1 y Owner RMON3 new Ter mei zl Index Delete Modify 11 Data Source cae y E D
259. s following the VBR 2 conformance definition Policed VBR3 atmCLPTaggingScrCdvt This traffic descriptor type is for CLP with tagging and Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the VBR 3 conformance definition Policed UBR1 atmNoCLPNoScrCdvt This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with CDVT and no Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to CBR connections following the UNI 3 0 3 1 conformance definition for PCR CLP 0 1 These CBR connections differ from CBR 1 connections in that the CLR objective applies only to the CLP 0 cell flow This traffic descriptor type is also applicable to connections following the UBR 1 conformance definition Policed UBR2 atmNoCLPTaggingNoScr This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with tagging and no Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the UBR 2 conformance definition Shaped UBR atmNoCLPNoScr This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP and no Sustained Cell Rate Shaped VBR atmCLPTransparent This traffic descriptor type is for the CLP transparent model with Sustained Cell Rate This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the VBR 1 conformance definition Connections specifying this traffic descriptor type will be rejected at UNI 3 0 or UNI 3 1 interfaces For a similar traffic descriptor type that can be accepted at UNI 3 0 an
260. s s slg al els sl sl g s s s e sl el alel sl sl ely s s s e sle alele sl el g 8 e e e 8 alel e s elg s s s s sle al sls sl elg 8 s s s s s s al alel sl alg 8 8 8 8 8 8 a 8 ak DEE 2 8 8 3 3 8 8 8 3 3 2 8 38 2 g g g 2 8 38 8 2 gi2 2182g sf afas 8 8 3 8 8 8 Si dia 5 a 20 20 EN a 8 8 8 a a 8 8 8 8 3 8 8 4 4 3 8 8 8 8 8 a 3a 8 8 gg 8 8 3 8 8 el a 8 8 8 8 8 a 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 era 8 8 3 8 S a 8 8 oke 8 8 8 8 8 8 3 8 a 8 8 8 8 8 a 4 8 8 8 8 3 8 8 24 8 8 3 8 8 8 8 8 8 4 4 3 8 8 8 3 8 8 4 4 38 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 2 88 20 2 9 20 ao 2 o 20 as 0 ss E 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 110 1 10 10 120 120 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 10 10 10 10 10 10 14 140 140 14 1 0 150 150 150 150 Im 15 10 168 180 1 120 170 120 100 19 19 a 19 190 190 1 190 20 20 20 210 210 210 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 8 8 8 amp s s 8 OCI Sg DIE 159 4 3 2 3 Carrier Data This option allows you to view the ADSL line carrier data From the ADSL menu click on Data amp Inventory and then Carrier Data The following page is displayed Select the line port 1 48 and carrier type LOAD or GAIN Then click on Query button Note that if the line port is still in loop testing status you cannot query the carrier
261. scription Set modem features enable disable Syntax modem features enable disable Parameter None 349 5 19 7 noisemargin Description Syntax Parameter 5 19 8 opmode Description Syntax Parameter 5 19 9 pbomode Description Syntax Parameter Set downstream upstream maximum minimum target noise margin noisemargin ds us max min target lt number gt Name Description Noise margin value Valid values 0 31 or 51 1 means no max noise margin is used step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt Set Operational mode opmode set clear lt opmode id gt Description The ID of allowed ADSL modes of operation Valid values Use list op mode command to see all the operation modes Default value Type Mandatory Name opmode id Set power backoff operation mode ON OFF pbomode us on off None 5 19 10 power mgt disable Description Syntax Parameter Disable power management function for ADSL power mgt disable None 5 19 11 power mgt D enable Description Syntax Parameter Allow autonomous L2 state entry exit power mgt I2 enable None 350 5 19 12 power mgt I2_I3 enable Description Allow autonomous L2 and L3 state entry exit Syntax power mgt ID ID enable Parameter None 5 19 13 power mgt 10 time Description Set the minimum time in seconds between Exit from L2 low power state and the next Entry
262. show help Parameter None 5 3 29 show http Description Syntax Parameter 5 3 30 show igmp Description Syntax Parameter Display HTTP Web port show http None Display IGMP information show igmp None 218 5 3 31 show igmp group Description Display IGMP VLAN group list Syntax show igmp group list show igmp group ip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt show igmp group ip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt src list show igmp group ip lt ipv4 address gt vlan lt VLAN ID gt src lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description ipv4 address IGMP group address Valid values 224 0 0 0 239 255 255 255 The range of addresses from 224 0 0 0 to 224 0 0 255 is reserved for the use of routing protocols and other low level topology discovery or maintenance protocols Default value Type Mandatory VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 32 show igmp rtport Description Display all IGMP router port list or by VLAN ID Syntax show igmp rtport vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 33 show igmp acl bind gigabit Description Display IGMP ACL bind status for gigabit interface Syntax show igmp acl bind gigabit lt port gt Parameter Name Description port Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type
263. ster network topology Star 76 For a cluster in Daisy Chain topology each IPDSLAM must have one GBE port configured as Uplink and the other one configured as User link From the System menu click on Cluster Setup The following page is displayed Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query Individual e By default the DSLAM is not in a cluster The state of the Cluster Configuration shows IDLE and the Role shows Individual To make the DSLAM join a cluster select the Role as Cluster or Slave only according to your plan and then click on Modify The state of the Cluster Configuration will show from DISCOVERING to VOTING to MASTER or SLAVE at last Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query NE1 255 0 The following figure shows the Cluster Setup page of a cluster containing two cluster members You will see the following page if you re connecting directly to the Master via its in band out band IP address or connecting to the Cluster IP 172 31 1 1 You can control all the IP DSLAMs in a cluster by connecting to the Cluster IP address or by directly connecting to the Master IPDSLAM via its in band or out band IP address that is configured in the Board IP Setup page D e Cluster Setup Cluster Configuration Modify Query Cluster Infomation Apply Cluster Setup Label Description Name Typ
264. t Source IP Type in the IP Address of the source MASK Type in the subnet mask Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table 110 Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete ADSL y Port 1 y evc 1 y NextNo 2 Destination Port 65535 Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering Setup Label Description Filtering Type You can also select the filtering type here Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table Valid Elter 10 number value 1 256 Once you have specified the serial number click on this SEN button to display the filter rules Once you have specified the serial number click on this Delete button to delete the filter rules in the table Click on these drop down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or abst y Port 1 y evc 1 y GIGA bridge port Destination Port Type in the Destination Port number 1 65535 Create Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table S Destination IP Filtering ADSL D Port 1 y evc 1 y Next No 2 Destination IP Filtering Filtering Type Destination IP y No From No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete Destination ip o D P P msp o fo fo Create GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN Destination IP Filtering S
265. t gigabit la many to one Description Set many to one VLAN translation for link aggregation gigabit interface Syntax vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit la many to one replaced lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt user port VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt uplink VLAN ID gt Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt PRIO ID gt Replaced the priority level of packets out through the uplink port with the specified value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory 288 5 4 143 vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Syntax Parameter Delete the specified entry from the VLAN translation table vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt disable Name Description lt port gt ADSL Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type
266. t gt Protocol VLAN Protocol Priority Remark PRI Remart 9 Protocol Remark y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete eca y cicat y Next No 2 Incoming Protocol O1ICMP e PrioritycOut 0 y Create GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN VLAN Priority Remark Setup Protocol Label Description VPRI Remark You can also select the priority remark type here Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view value range No From To is 1 256 To query entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button Query to retrieve Delet To delete entries type in the entry number range and then click on this button e to delete Click on these drop down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA bridge oia y ccs y SH p ge p g Click on the drop down list and select the incoming protocol Incoming Protocol Available options are ICMP IGMP IP in IP TCP GRP IGP UDP GRE IGRP or OSPF Priority Out Click on the drop down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority 0 7 Create Click on this button to create a new entry in the table 125 lt Ether Type eca D clica y NextNo 2 Incoming EtherType Ox Priority out 9 zl Create VLAN Priority Remark YPRI Remark 10 Ether Type Remark y No From 41 To No range from 1 to 256 Query Delete GIGA BRIDGE XDSL BRIDGE STAT
267. t Configuration Select D Boot Config Partition2 el Apply FLASH DEVICE oO IMAGE FILE 1 Boot Point Selector o O System Configuration 0 IMAGE FILE 2 System Configuration 49 2 3 4 Firmware Update For CLI If you want to update firmware code you must get image file from FTP Server Suppose that FTP Server IP address is 172 16 10 219 and the image filename is vmlinux_u4802_ 0 73B05 Example 1 Firmware update enable go to enable mode configure go to configuration mode firmware login 172 16 10 219 username share password tg123 firmware upgrade vmlinux_u4802_0 73B05 Firmware upgrade may take a few minutes don t turn off or reset the system during the process You can get status using command show firmware status in Enable execution mode exit back to enable mode show firmware status When status returns Upgraded already you can restart the system to run new firmware image Once you upgrade successfully you can t upgrade the second time unless you have restarted the system show firmware partition show partition information Current Version 0 71B09 Partition Version Date Status 1 0 71B09 2007 07 05 2 0 71B09 2007 07 10 Active Note the Active status of the firmware partition information means the active partition for next time restart not current running partition You can see which partition is current running partition by referring to the Current
268. t VPI gt lt VCl gt Name Description lt VPI gt Virtual Path Identifier Valid values 0 255 Default value 0 Type Mandatory lt VCl gt Virtual Channel Identifier Valid values 21 32 65535 Default value 35 Type Mandatory List ATM traffic descriptor pvc atmdesc None 311 5 11 9 pvc atmdesc plc Description Set ATM police Rx descriptor Syntax pvc atmdesc plc lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 5 11 10 pvc atmdesc shp Description Set ATM shaped Tx descriptor Syntax pvc atmdesc shp lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt ATM descriptor number Valid values Enter pvc atmdesc command to see the descriptor list Default value Type Mandatory 5 11 11 pvc encapsulation Description Set Encapsulation type Syntax pvc encapsulation llc vemux Parameter None 5 11 12 uplink gigabit Description Set GBE uplink mode general or LACP Syntax uplink lt port gt la Parameter Name Description lt port gt Gigabit Ethernet port number Valid values 1 2 Default value Type Mandatory 312 5 12 Access List Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the ACL execution mode 5 12 1 bcrate cir
269. t number gt Name Description lt number gt ATM Description number Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory 323 5 13 3 ubr1 Description Syntax Parameter 5 13 4 ubr2 Description Syntax Parameter UBR type 1 traffic setting atmNoClpNoScrCadvt ubr1 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory UBR type 2 traffic setting atmNoClpTaggingNoScr ubr2 lt index gt pcr lt pcr gt cdvt lt cdvt gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory lt pcr gt Peak cell rate number Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory lt cdvt gt Cell Delay Variation Tolerance Valid values 0 65535 Default value Type Mandatory 324 5 13 5 unshp Description Syntax Parameter 5 13 6 vbr1 Description Syntax Parameter unshaped traffic setting atmNoTrafficDescriptor unshp lt index gt Name Description lt index gt ATM Descriptor index Valid values 1 251 Default value Type Mandatory VBR type
270. t pvc gt lt VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one Description Syntax Parameter Set one to one VLAN translation 1 C tag reserved vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one reserved priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 2 C tag replaced vlan trans vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one replaced lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 3 Stacking and C tag reserved vlan trans vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one stacking lt uplink VLAN ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt 4 Stacking and C tag replaced vlan translation lt port gt lt pvc gt lt user port VLAN ID gt gigabit lt port gt one to one stacking lt uplink VLAN ID gt ctag replaced lt c tag VLAN ID gt lt c tag PRIO ID gt priority reserved priority replaced lt PRIO ID gt Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory lt user port VLAN ID gt ADSL port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt uplink VLAN ID gt Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory
271. t the commands for creating modifying deleting account and displaying running configuration Guest Guest can run most commands except the commands that have default creating modifying deleting purpose 204 Screen Description LOCAL login admin Password this is motd file to inform any information to user ls stem Description IDL 4502 46 port ADSL2 POTS Hardware Version B i Firmware Version 0 32 System Hu FW SW version System Information Compiled Tue Novy 7 11 03 45 CST 2006 Disable mode Exit current mode Help command List command System Shell or System commands Cluster management switch Global Command and Description General Command and Description Enable execute mode Show commands Screen Description 205 Execution Modes The CLI contains several execution modes Users will see different set of commands under different execution modes Following table lists all the execution modes and their purposes When users enter a certain execution mode the corresponding mode prompt will be displayed automatically on the screen The mode prompts of all the execution modes are also listed in list of Execution modes List of Execution Modes Execute mode Description Prompt symbol Initialize Without login prompt or already gt authenticated Enable Management capable Configure Configuration capable conf Interface Interface
272. t to the Following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this Device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation CE mark Warning The is a class A device In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Trademarks The PLANET logo is a trademark of PLANET Technology This documentation may refer to numerous hardware and software products by their trade names In most if not all cases these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks by their respective companies WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal E waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Safety This equipment is designed with the utmost care for the safety of those who install and use it However special attention must be paid to the dangers of electric shock and static electricity when working with electrical equipment All guidelines of this and of the computer manufacture must therefore be allowed at all times to ensure the safe use of the equipment Revision User s Manual for PLA
273. t1 PVC1 if ADSL VID 5 translates to GIGA1 VID 1 then you cannot make ADSL VID 5 translate to another GIGA VID You also cannot make another ADSL VID translate to GIGA VID1 Upstream C Tag gt User port Uplink port gt S Tag Downstream S Tag gt Uplink port User port gt C Tag 3 Stacking In this mode the system will add S TAG before user port s C TAG Note that the mapping from C Tag to S Tag C Tag is still one to one So a user port s C Tag can t be used for another translation rule as well as an uplink port s S Tag C Tag Upstream C Tag gt User port Uplink port gt S Tag C Tag Downstream S Tag C Tag gt Uplink port User port gt C Tag 4 Stacking and Replaced In this mode the system will replace the user port s C Tag to C Tag and add S Tag before C Tag Note that the mapping from C Tag to S Tag C Tag is still one to one So a user port s C Tag can t be used for another translation rule as well as an uplink port s S Tag C Tag Upstream C Tag gt User port Uplink port gt S Tag C Tag Downstream S Tag C Tag Uplink port User port gt C Tag Translation VLAN 4 1 User Mode H 1 User Mode C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode sTag ether type OX 8100 Set Default 3 Port vm VLAN ID List 1 ADSL Port DVC Doete 1 Hew CVLAN Priority Hew CVLAH ID UPLINK VLAH ADSL VID UPLINK Port U
274. tax stack enable disable Parameter None 5 7 22 stack tls port enable Description Enable VLAN stack TLS transparent LAN service port Syntax stack tls port enable disable Parameter None 5 7 23 tcm policer Description Bind Unbind Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile Syntax tcm policer lt number gt bind unbind Parameter Name Description lt number gt TCM policer profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 24 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Delete a VLAN from memberset table Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 7 25 vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 297 5 7 26 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority Description Set VLAN memberset priority specify priority level or reserved the originalpriority tag or untag enable or disable port isolation Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority lt prio ID gt reserved tag untag isolation disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type M
275. te Status This field shows current status of firmware update process Select firmware memory partition Partition 1 or 2 If you Firmware Partition Select change to the other partition not current partition the system will restart immediately This section displays the partition information including firmware version updating date and status active or not Note that active partition means the partition for next power up Partition Information not current partition in use You can refer to Current Version to know which partition is the current partition in use When you update the firmware new firmware will be written to the partition that is not currently in use FTP Get in progress The following message is displayed during getting file from FTP server incoming cluster id O FTP SERVER IP 172 16 10 219 Waiting for FTP Session about 30 sec Firmware Write in progress The Flash Write process may take a few minutes you must not turn off or reset the system during the process 1 Warning Upgrading firmware may take a few minutes please don t turn off or reset the system 2 0nce the system has upgraded already please restart it Firmware Write successfully When the Flash Write process has completed successfully the Firmware Update Status shows Firmware has upgraded already You can now restart the system O OO 2 i 21 Firmware Partition Select Partition
276. the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlin Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 46 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlog Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of near end hlog upstream by Bridge port the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne us hlog Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 47 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds load Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of near end load downstream by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds load Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 48 show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds gain Description Syntax Parameter Display carrier information of near end gain downstream by Bridge port show interface xdsl all lt port gt adsl carrier ne ds gain Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 223 5 3 49 show interface xdsl all lt port
277. the ADSL bridge interface setup page otherwise the VLAN translation rule here will not take effect From the Bridge menu click on VLAN Configuration and then Translation VLAN The following page is displayed Click on the radio button to select translation Mode first Translation VLAN 4 1 User Mode H 1 User Mode C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode sTag ether type Ox 8100 Set Port Default VID VLAH ID List ADSL Port PVC 1 1 58 Dette UPLINK Priority ADSL VID UPLINK Port UPLINK VID VLAN MODE Create gt fi y Select y 62_v1D 2 y E y REPLACED y GIGA BRIDGE ADSL BRIDGE STATIC VLAN J Actually the IDL 4802 provides five translation modes four for 1 1 VLAN one for N 1 VLAN 1 1 VLAN including 1 1 User Mode and C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode If the ADSL user bridge port only has 1 1 VLAN then MAC learning function of this bridge port can be disabled 1 Reserved In this mode the system does not make any change on C Tag That is the uplink port s S Tag is actually the C Tag The system provides a tunnel for the user port and uplink port And one VLAN ID can only make one tunnel Replaced In this mode the system will change the user port s C Tag to the Uplink port s S Tag And the mapping is one to one that is one user port s C Tag one VID can only translate to one uplink port s S Tag one VID and vice versa For example for ADSL Por
278. tion The HK circuit contains a photo coupler powered by the IDL 4802 to detect the open or close status of the loop between HK_IN and HK_COM users don t need to feed 3 3v power into the circuit As to the alarm output there is a relay between ALMOUT and ALMCOM to control the status of the loop to be OPEN or CLOSE to the alarm equipment close between ALMOUT and ALMCOM for alarm open if no alarm HK Port RJ 50 pin assignment ALMOUT HK AIN HK1COM HK2IN HK2COM HK3IN HK3COM HK4IN HK4COM ALMCOM 123456789 10 III 00 30d hh Go N z5 CH Note The maximum current and voltage for ALMOUT ALMCOM is restricted to 0 5 A 30 VDC or 0 15 A 125 VAC resistive load 32 Operation diagram of Housekeeping Inputs and Alarm Contact Output Environment Sensor IDL 4802 IDL 4802 ALMOUT Alarm Equipment ALMCOM 33 2 3 WEB Configuration This section describes how to use Web Configuration Tool to maintain your IP DSLAM The IDL 4802 contains a HTTP server You can login and configure it by using your Web Browser 2 3 1 System Prepartion Before attempting to configure the IDL 4802 please ensure as below Set your computer s IP with the same network segment of the IP DSLAM For example IDL 4802 default MGMT IP is 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 Then you can set computer s IP to 192 168 1 x 255 255 255 0 The range for x is from 2 to 253 Internet Proto
279. tory 5 4 14 cluster cfg management Description Set cluster management IP configuration Syntax cluster cfg management ip lt ipv4 address gt netmask lt netmask gt gateway lt ipv4 address gt Parameter Name Description lt ipv4 address gt IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Netmask of the management port Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional 5 4 15 cluster cfg name Description Set the NE name in a cluster Syntax cluster cfg name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt A name for NE Identification Valid values max length 31 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 16 cluster cfg role Description Set cluster role to System decide or Slave only or Not in a cluster default Syntax cluster cfg role cluster slave only individual Parameter None 245 5 4 17 cluster cfg voting key Description Set cluster voting key for the priority to be a Master Syntax cluster cfg voting key lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Cluster voting key Valid values 0 4294967295 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 4 18 dsl line identify dhcp Description Set DHCP Relay Option82 enable disable Syntax dsl line identify dhcp enable disable Parameter None 5 4 19 dsl line identify dhcp
280. traffic sent out from GBE port Syntax management gbe vlan priority lt prio ID gt Parameter Name Description lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 5 4 57 management mgmt Description Set MGMT management port IP address Syntax management mgmt lt ipv4 adderss gt netmask lt netmask gt Parameter Name Description ipv4 address IP address with classful netmask Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory netmask Netmask of the management port Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional 5 4 58 pm clear Description Clear current performance monitoring data Syntax pm clear lt port gt Parameter Name Description lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 256 5 4 59 port template mask Description Syntax Parameter Mask the function profile of template line port Mask means to select this item to be copied to other ports port template mask xdsl lineconf xdsl profile xdsl adminstatus dsl dentify trust pvc vlan bridge igmp acl filter priority remark priority regen ethernet policer None 5 4 60 port template unmask Description Syntax Parameter Unmask the function profile of template line port Un Mask means not to select this item to be copied to other ports port
281. tream direction Syntax noisemargin ds us downshift upshift lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Downshift Upshift Noise Margin tenth symbols Valid values 0 31 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 18 7 ra interval Description Set Downshift Upshift Interval in downstream upstream direction Syntax ra interval ds us downshift upshift lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Downshift Upshift interval seconds Valid values 0 16383 Default value 10 Type Mandatory 5 18 8 service name Description Set service profile name Syntax service name lt string gt Parameter Name Description lt string gt Profile name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory 347 5 19 Spectrum Profile Configure Mode Commands The commands in this section can be executed only in the Spectrum Profile execution mode 5 19 1 aggregate Description Set downstream upstream aggregate power level Syntax aggregate ds us max powerlevel lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Power level tenth dBm Valid values 0 25 5 step 0 1 Default value Type Mandatory 5 19 2 bands lt index gt start stop Description Set RF bands Syntax bands lt index gt start stop lt value gt Parameter Name Description index Bands array index
282. trol D NextNo 3 Data Source GBE1 D RMON3 Requested 50 Interval 1800 new RMON History Control Table Label Description Data Source Data source identifies the source of the data for which historical data was collected and placed in a table on behalf of this HistoryControl entry Here the source is GBE1 interface or GBE2 interface Owner An owner is the entity that configured this entry and is therefore using the resources assigned to it Requested Requested value is the requested number of intervals over which data is to be saved in the part of the media specific table associated with this HistoryControl entry Granted The number of sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of the media specific table associated with this HistoryControl entry Interval The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the part of the media specific table associated with this HistoryControl entry The value range is 1 to 3600 sec 194 lt gt ETH History This option is for displaying Ethernet interface RMON history data Before a history table is available you have to create a History Control entry in advance To query the History table click on the History Index drop down list and select a history table and then click on Query Remote Monitoring ETH History Select Type ETH History Y History Index History1 zl Query RMON ETH History Tabl
283. ts for users who access the DSLAM From the System menu click on User Administration Click on Select drop down list and select a page to display The following page is displayed User Administration Page Page 1 of 4 No 1 to 8 y New To Create an new user account need not select radiobox ce Delete Modify The admin account supports without deleting S s User Administration Label Description Page Click on the drop down list and select the page to be displayed Click on this button to create a new user You will enter the following page User Administration New username2 RARRAAAKK comment2 Once you have typed in all the information for the new user click on the Create button Click on the radio button on the leftmost column of the user table to select Delete Modify the user you want to delete modify Then click on Delete Modify button Note that the default admin user cannot be deleted User Name Shows the name of the user up to 32 characters vel The available access levels include SUPERUSER ENGINEER and GUEST Aging day Set password expiration days 0 for no expiration days Start Date Shows the day when the account was first created Last Login Shows the day when a user last login Comment Description about the user account up to 31 characters When a new account is added for example Test1 is added 84 When user Test1 inte
284. ty lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Priority value Valid values 0 240 step 16 Default value 255 Type Mandatory 5 8 15 tcm policer Description Bind Unbind Three Color Marking TCM Policer profile Syntax tcm policer lt number gt bind unbind Parameter Name Description lt number gt TCM policer profile index Valid values 1 48 Default value Type Mandatory 301 5 8 16 vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Description Delete a VLAN from memberset table Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 8 17 vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Description Show memberset setting by VLAN Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt list Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 8 18 vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority Description Set VLAN memberset priority specify priority level or reserved the original priority tag or untag enable or disable port isolation Syntax vlan lt VLAN ID gt priority lt prio ID gt reserved tag untag isolation disable Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority ID Valid values 0 7 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 302
285. ty list vlanid lt number gt Parameter Name Description number VLAN ID priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 93 show priority queue config Description Display Priority and Queue mapping configuration Syntax show priority queue config Parameter None 5 3 94 show priority regen Description Display VLAN priority tag filter Syntax show priority regen Parameter None 233 5 3 95 show profile alarm all Description Display alarm profile Syntax show profile alarm all Parameter None 5 3 96 show profile igmp acl Description Display IGMP ACL profile Syntax show profile igmp acl lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 15 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 97 show profile rate limit policer Description Display rate limit policer information Syntax show profile rate limit policer Parameter None 5 3 98 show profile service adsl Description Display ADSL service profile Syntax show profile service adsl lt number gt all Parameter Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 120 Default value Type Optional 5 3 99 show profile spectrum adsl Description Display ADSL service profile Syntax show profile service adsl lt number gt all Parameter Name Description lt number gt Profile index Valid values 1 120
286. ty value of all packets sent out from this bridge port s default VLAN to be the default VLAN priority so this rule only works on default VLAN of this bridge port ingress force applying the default VLAN priority value to all the packets received on this bridge port so this rule will work on all the member set of this bridge port both combine the rules of Ingress and Egress force priority disable engress ingress both None IGMP ACL Access Control List binding profile configuration igmp acl bind lt number gt on on off reset Name Description lt number gt IGMP ACL profile index Valid values 1 15 Default value 0 Type Mandatory 293 5 7 8 Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 9 ingress Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 10 ip allowed Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 11 isolation Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 12 mac learning Description Syntax Parameter 5 7 13 max mac Description Syntax Parameter igmp acl max group Per port limit IGMP join group number igmp acl max group lt number gt Name Description IGMP ACL profile index Valid values 1 128 Default value 8 Type Mandatory lt number gt Enable disable ingress filter mode ingress enable disable None Enable disable IP allowed function user can specify allowed source IP address per bridge port ip allowed enable disable None Enable Disable def
287. ual Rate changed manually Init Rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change after that Dynamic Rate automatically selected at initialization and is continuously adapted during operation show time Rate Mode Upstream Click on the drop down list and select the Upstream Rate Adaptive Mode Valid options are Manual Rate changed manually Init Rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change after that Dynamic Rate automatically selected at initialization and is continuously adapted during operation show time 147 4 3 1 2 Service Channel Profile This option allows you to configure the ADSL service channel profile From the ADSL menu click on Profile and then Service Profile Channel The following page is displayed ADSL Service Channel Profile Select Index a yes y Modify The First Index is default profile cant modify amp delete To modify a service channel profile please create service main profile first BitRate Downshift Upshift ee SECH kbit s 0 65535 Noise Min Noise Min id ch L2 SE Index Packet Direction SS a E A L2 Margin Interval Margin Interval Heras o bla SZ Min db sec db sec essere coa E Fees eee pe eee ga i a ADSL Service Channel Profile setup Label Description Click on the drop down list and select the range of profile index Options are 1 5 6 10 116 120 This field shows the profile in
288. ult value Type Mandatory 263 5 4 83 rmon alarm lt index gt rising_eventindex Description Set RMON alarm rising event index Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt rising_eventindex lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt RMON alarm rising event index Valid values 1 128 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 84 rmon alarm lt index gt rising_threshold Description Set RMON alarm rising threshold Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt rising_threshold lt number gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory lt number gt RMON alarm rising threshold Valid values 0 4294967295 Default value Type Mandatory 5 4 85 rmon alarm lt index gt sample_type Description RMON alarm sample type Compared directly with the thresholds or Difference compared with the thresholds Syntax rmon alarm lt index gt sample_type absolute delta Parameter Name Description lt index gt RMON alarm entry index Valid values 1 64 Default value Type Mandatory 264 5 4 86 rmon alarm lt index gt startup_alarm Description RMON startup alarm Rising threshold alarm Falling threshold alarm or Both rising and falling threshold alarm Syntax rmon alarm lt index
289. ult value is 2 Forwarding Delay Sets the time that the bridge spends in listening or learning states when the bridge is or is attempting to become the root bridge This can be any value in seconds between 4 and 30 BUT it is constrained by the maxage and hellotimes The maxage hellotime and forwarddelay times are constrained as follows 2 x forwarddelay 1 2 maxage maxage 2 2 x hellotime 1 For example the default settings are 2x 15 1 220 20 gt 2x 2 1 Current Status Current system STP setting and status are shown in the Current Status table 106 4 2 3 2 Port Setting This page allows you to setup the STP Port From the Bridge menu click on Spanning Tree and then Port Settings The following page is displayed STP Port Settings Priority 128 Edge Type Edge False y Path Cost 100 STP Port Settings Label Description Priority Type in the priority level of the port 0 240 in step of 16 Edge Type Click on this drop down list and select RSTP type Edge True or Edge False Path Cost Type in the Path Cost through the port 1 65535 integer number Select the trunk link in the table type in or select new value for the above fields and then click on this button to submit the modification Modify 107 4 2 4 Access Control 4 2 4 1 Filtering This option allows you to setup the filter rule for the packets From the Bridge menu click on Access
290. up a Master and a Slave IPDSLAM some parameters need to be well configured 1 Cluster domain name The group name for a cluster Must be the same on Master and Slave 2 Cluster IP address IP address to be used for remote management when Master and Slave are grouped together 3 NE cluster name A name to identify Master or Slave 4 Set private IP address on in band port for both Master and Slave IPDSLAM The private IP is used for communication between Master and Slave The management center actually uses Cluster IP address for remote management 5 Master and Slave need to be configured with same management VLAN 6 The default gateway should be configured to the router that is aware how to route management traffic to Management Center of the management network The setting of Cluster default gateway should be the same between Master and Slave Currently a IDL 4802 cluster can support up to four cluster members NES The IPDSLAMs in a cluster must all be in band connected through the GBE ports There are two possible network topologies for conducting a Clustering Management group Daisy chain and Star PC out band management Master Slave Slave 1DL 4802 IDL4802 IDL4802 GBE BE GBE GBE Uplink User link Uplink User link E MAN PC in band management Cluster network topology Daisy Chain Master Slave Slave IDL4802 IDL4802 IDL4802 GBE GBE i GBE Uplink SR Uplink LAN GBE uplink Clu
291. value Type Mandatory lt ipv4 address gt Destination IP address Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value 0 0 0 0 Type Mandatory lt netmask gt Subnet mask Valid values xxx xxx xxx xxx xxx 0 255 Default value Type Optional Show destination IP address priority list dstip list None Specify dest MAC of packets to remark vlan priority Show dest MAC priority list entry Disable dest MAC priority list entry dstmac lt number gt prio lt prio ID gt xdsl lt port gt lt pvc gt gigabit lt port gt la mac lt mac address gt dstmac lt number gt list dstmac lt number gt disable Name Description lt number gt Destination MAC priority list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Mandatory lt prio ID gt Priority value Valid values 0 7 Default value Type Mandatory lt port gt Port number Valid values 1 48 for xDSL 1 2 for GBE Default value Type Mandatory lt pvc gt PVC number Valid values 1 8 Default value Type Mandatory 333 lt mac address gt MAC address Valid values xx xx xXx Xx xx xx xx 0 ff Default value 00 00 00 00 00 00 Type Mandatory 5 14 6 dstmac list Description Show destination MAC priority list Syntax dstmac list Parameter None 5 14 7 ethertype Description Specify Ether Type of packets to remark vian priority Show Ether Type priority list e
292. vel configurable and can be Major and Minor All the alarms are mask able Fault management provides the alarm output through hardware output interface on the system front panel and visible indicator LED The alarm status indications are automatically generated as a result of certain events conditions The IDL 4802 supports query of all current alarm status It is also able to keep 256 records of historical alarms and events respectively The IDL 4802 provides the ability to group alarms in a hierarchical alarm presentation scheme Alarms of the same rank can exist at the same time A lower ranking alarm will be demoted if a higher ranking alarm is raised for the same object For example if a far end LOS is raised on a circuit and then a far end LPR is raised on the circuit the LPR alarm stands and the LOS closes The alarm hierarchy used in the IDL 4802 system is shown in the following table Alarm Hierarchy Priority Alarm Type Highest all activation failures ADSL_COMMF_FE or ADSL_NOPEER_FE far end LPR near end LOS or far end LOS Lowest near end LOF or far end LOF near end and far end are independent for example FE LOS does not restrain NE LOF Note 1 LOM LCD and NCD are not included in the alarm hierarchy they re treated independently 2 The PM counters LPR LOS and LOF follow the alarm hierarchy rule When these alarms exist at the same time only the PM counter of a higher ranking alarm will count
293. w stp None 5 3 114 show syslog server Description Syntax Parameter Display IP address of the syslog server show syslog server None 237 5 3 115 show system Description Display system information inventory name performance Syntax show system information inventory name performance Parameter None 5 3 116 show tcm config Description Display TCM Three Color Marking Policer configuration Syntax show tcm config Parameter None 5 3 117 show tcm policer Description Display TCM Policer Binding Table Syntax show tcm policer Parameter None 5 3 118 show temperature Description Display system temperature Syntax show temperature Parameter None 5 3 119 show time Description Display current time Syntax showtime Parameter None 5 3 120 show uptime Description Display System up time and CPU loading Syntax show uptime Parameter None 5 3 121 show version Description Display CLI software version Syntax show version Parameter None 5 3 122 show version detail Description Display CLI software version and system information Syntax show version detail Parameter None 238 5 3 123 show vlan Description Display bridge port member set Syntax show vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description lt VLAN ID gt VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Optional 5 3 124 show vlan ethertype Description Show VLAN S Tag Ether type Syntax show vlan ethertype
294. x fragments packets Jabbers Monitoring rx jabber packets Collisions Monitoring tx single collision packets Pkts64Octets Monitoring tx 64 octets Pkts65to127Octets Monitoring tx 65 to 127 octets Pkts128to255Octets Monitoring tx 128 to 255 octets Pkts256to511Octets Monitoring tx 256 to 511 octets Pkts512to10230Octets Monitoring tx 512 to 1023 octets Pkts1024to15180Octets Monitoring tx 1024 to 1518 octets RMON ETH History Control variables Variable Description HistoryDropEvents Monitoring rx dropped packets HistoryOctets Monitoring rx bytes packets HistoryPkts Monitoring rx packets HistoryBroadcastPkts Monitoring rx broadcast packets HistoryMulticastPkts Monitoring rx multicast packets HistoryCRCAlignErrors Monitoring rx error aligment packets HistoryUndersizePkts Monitoring rx undersize packets HistoryOversizePkts Monitoring rx oversize packets HistoryFragments Monitoring rx fragments packets HistoryJabbers Monitoring rx jabber packets HistoryCollisions Monitoring tx single collision packets HistoryTxBytes Monitoring tx bytes HistoryTxPackets Monitoring tx packets HistoryTxMulticast Monitoring tx multicast HistoryTxBroadcast Monitoring tx broadcast HistoryUtilization Monitoring tx Utilization 59 3 4 Fault Management Fault management is conceptually partitioned into two levels the system top level and interface specific level Both levels are alarm le
295. y lt name gt password lt password gt level lt level gt comment lt comment gt comment lt comment gt password expiration lt day number gt H account modify lt name gt level lt level gt comment lt comment gt account modify lt name gt password expiration lt day number gt Parameter Name Description lt name gt ID name max 31 characters Default value Type Mandatory lt password gt Input password max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional lt level gt Set access level Valid values superuser engineer guest Default value guest Type Optional lt comment gt Set comment max 31 characters Default value space char Type Optional day number Set password expiration days O disable Default value Type Optional 242 5 4 5 aging Description Bridge aging time Syntax aging lt number gt Parameter Name Description number Aging time sec Valid values 10 1000000 sec Default value 300 Type Mandatory 5 4 6 alarm aco active Description Set ACO active Syntax alarm aco active Parameter None 5 4 7 alarm event clear Description Clear alarm event log Syntax alarm event clear Parameter None 5 4 8 alarm history clear Description Clear alarm history Syntax alarm history clear Parameter None 5 49 atmdesc Description Go to ATM description execution mode from Configure mode Syntax atmdesc Parameter No
296. y index Syntax show access list ip allowed lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Static IP allowed access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 8 show access list ipprotocol Description Display all IP protocol deny access list or by index Syntax show access list ipprotocol lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt IP Protocol deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 214 5 3 9 show access list l4dstport Description Display all L4 dest port deny access list or by index Syntax show access list l4dstport lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt L4 destination port deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 10 show access list mcfldrate Description Display all flooding rate limiting list or by VLAN ID Syntax show access list mcfldrate vlan lt VLAN ID gt Parameter Name Description VLAN ID VLAN ID Valid values 1 4094 Default value Type Mandatory 5 3 11 show access list srcip Description Display all source IP deny access list or by index Syntax show access list srcip lt index gt Parameter Name Description lt index gt Source IP deny access list number Valid values 1 256 Default value Type Optional 5 3 12 show ac

User`s Manual - PLANET Technology Corporation.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents